1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
In Stock & Ready to Ship | Lead Time: 4–8 Weeks | RTO from $49/mo

Metal Carports & Carport Kits For Sale

Shop 35+ prefab steel carport sizes from $1,195. Regular, A-Frame & vertical roof styles in 12 or 14 gauge. Free delivery & professional installation on every tubular steel order across all 48 states.

$1,195
Starting Price
35+
Sizes In Stock
20yr
Warranty — 12ga
48
States Covered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2561–2600 of 2723 resultsSorted by price: low to high

20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Agricultural Barn

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Agricultural Barn | Steel and Stud — From $21,200
12
20×75 Agricultural Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,150$21,200SAVE $2,950
or $442/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Agricultural Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Agricultural Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Farmers store hay, feed, and small implements in a 20×75 agricultural barn with open eaves for ventilation and a sliding gable-end door wide enough to back a tractor through. The long footprint lets you keep round bales.

You're viewing:Agricultural Barn·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,200$24,150Save $2,950
or as low as $442/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$21,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Eaves
  • Sliding Gable Door
  • Vented Ridge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-AGRICULTURAL-BARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your farm + ranch barn.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Split-use layout with a lockable supply room. Farmers store hay, feed, and small implements in a 20×75 agricultural barn with open eaves for ventilation and a sliding gable-end door wide enough to back a tractor through.

Equipment / stock bayCENTER WORK ALLEYFeed + tool room20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · farm + ranch barn

Equipment / stock bay · Center work alley · Feed + tool room

Equipment / stock bay at the front, center work alley in the middle, feed + tool room at the rear. Capacity: equipment + animals + feed under one roof. The long footprint lets you keep round bales at one end and equipment at the other without cross-contamination.

💡 Pro tip:Vented Ridge. Size affords: stall partitions, hay loft, wash-down bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Agricultural Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Barn spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural barn
Everyday agricultural barn
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural barn + seasonal storage
agricultural barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Agricultural Barn — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$442/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 agricultural barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $442/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Agricultural Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Agricultural Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Barn also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 agricultural barn cost?

A 20×75 agricultural barn from Steel and Stud starts at $21,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $442/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 agricultural barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 agricultural barn?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 agricultural barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 agricultural barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 agricultural barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $442/month on a 20×75 agricultural barn.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 agricultural barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 agricultural barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 agricultural barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Agricultural Barn

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Agricultural Barn | Steel and Stud — From $21,200
12
20×75 Agricultural Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$24,150$21,200SAVE $2,950
or $442/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Agricultural Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Agricultural Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Farmers store hay, feed, and small implements in a 20×75 agricultural barn with open eaves for ventilation and a sliding gable-end door wide enough to back a tractor through. The long footprint lets you keep round bales.

You're viewing:Agricultural Barn·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,200$24,150Save $2,950
or as low as $442/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$21,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Eaves
  • Sliding Gable Door
  • Vented Ridge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-AGRICULTURAL-BARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your farm + ranch barn.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Split-use layout with a lockable supply room. Farmers store hay, feed, and small implements in a 20×75 agricultural barn with open eaves for ventilation and a sliding gable-end door wide enough to back a tractor through.

Equipment / stock bayCENTER WORK ALLEYFeed + tool room20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · farm + ranch barn

Equipment / stock bay · Center work alley · Feed + tool room

Equipment / stock bay at the front, center work alley in the middle, feed + tool room at the rear. Capacity: equipment + animals + feed under one roof. The long footprint lets you keep round bales at one end and equipment at the other without cross-contamination.

💡 Pro tip:Vented Ridge. Size affords: stall partitions, hay loft, wash-down bay.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Agricultural Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Barn spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural barn
Everyday agricultural barn
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural barn + seasonal storage
agricultural barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Agricultural Barn — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$442/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 agricultural barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $442/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Agricultural Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Agricultural Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Barn also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 agricultural barn cost?

A 20×75 agricultural barn from Steel and Stud starts at $21,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $442/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 agricultural barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 agricultural barn?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 agricultural barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 agricultural barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 agricultural barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $442/month on a 20×75 agricultural barn.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 agricultural barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 agricultural barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 agricultural barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Equipment Storage Building

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Equipment Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $22,800
12
20×75 Equipment Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,000$22,800SAVE $3,200
or $475/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Equipment Storage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Equipment Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Construction and landscaping companies use the 20×75 for cold storage of skid steers, mini excavators, attachments, and trailers. 12-16 ft leg heights clear most rollback trailers and lift-bed trucks. A single 20×75.

You're viewing:Equipment Storage Building·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,800$26,000Save $3,200
or as low as $475/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12' Roll-Up
  • 16' Leg Option
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. Construction and landscaping companies use the 20×75 for cold storage of skid steers, mini excavators, attachments, and trailers.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof. 12-16 ft leg heights clear most rollback trailers and lift-bed trucks.

💡 Pro tip:16' Leg Option. Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Equipment Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage building
Everyday equipment storage building
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage building + seasonal storage
equipment storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Equipment Storage Building — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$475/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 equipment storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $475/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Equipment Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Equipment Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 equipment storage building cost?

A 20×75 equipment storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $22,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $475/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 equipment storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 equipment storage building?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 equipment storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 equipment storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 equipment storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $475/month on a 20×75 equipment storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 equipment storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 equipment storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 equipment storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×75 equipment storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Equipment Storage Building

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Equipment Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $22,800
12
20×75 Equipment Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$26,000$22,800SAVE $3,200
or $475/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Equipment Storage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Equipment Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Construction and landscaping companies use the 20×75 for cold storage of skid steers, mini excavators, attachments, and trailers. 12-16 ft leg heights clear most rollback trailers and lift-bed trucks. A single 20×75.

You're viewing:Equipment Storage Building·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,800$26,000Save $3,200
or as low as $475/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 12' Roll-Up
  • 16' Leg Option
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-EQUIPMENT-STORAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. Construction and landscaping companies use the 20×75 for cold storage of skid steers, mini excavators, attachments, and trailers.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof. 12-16 ft leg heights clear most rollback trailers and lift-bed trucks.

💡 Pro tip:16' Leg Option. Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Equipment Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Storage Building spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment storage building
Everyday equipment storage building
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment storage building + seasonal storage
equipment storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Equipment Storage Building — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$475/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 equipment storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $475/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Equipment Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Equipment Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 equipment storage building cost?

A 20×75 equipment storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $22,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $475/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 equipment storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 equipment storage building?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 equipment storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 equipment storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 equipment storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $475/month on a 20×75 equipment storage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 equipment storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 equipment storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 equipment storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×75 equipment storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub | Steel and Stud — From $22,400
12
20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,550$22,400SAVE $3,150
or $467/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Mobile contractors running plumbing, HVAC, electrical, or pest-control crews use the 20×75 as a dispatch hub: two service vans staged at the gable doors, a 15-ft parts and inventory room partitioned at the back, and a.

You're viewing:Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,400$25,550Save $3,150
or as low as $467/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Window
  • Office + Parts Partition
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-MOBILE-CONTRACTOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial storage layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Laid out on forklift turning radii. Mobile contractors running plumbing, HVAC, electrical, or pest-control crews use the 20×75 as a dispatch hub: two service vans staged at the gable doors, a 15-ft parts and inventory room partitioned at the back, and a small office with a storefront window facing the lot for customer pickups.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Racked inventory rowsForklift aisle + stagingReceiving + office corner20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · commercial storage layout

Racked inventory rows · Forklift aisle + staging · Receiving + office corner

Racked inventory rows at the front, forklift aisle + staging in the middle, receiving + office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~30 pallet positions. Insulated walls keep parts inventory and seasonal stock stable year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Office + Parts Partition. Size affords: pallet racking, dock or grade-level doors, office build-out.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday mobile contractor dispatch hub
Everyday mobile contractor dispatch hub
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mobile contractor dispatch hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmobile contractor dispatch hub + seasonal storage
mobile contractor dispatch hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$467/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $467/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub cost?

A 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub from Steel and Stud starts at $22,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $467/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud mobile contractor dispatch hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mobile contractor dispatch hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $467/month on a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub | Steel and Stud — From $22,400
12
20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,550$22,400SAVE $3,150
or $467/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Mobile contractors running plumbing, HVAC, electrical, or pest-control crews use the 20×75 as a dispatch hub: two service vans staged at the gable doors, a 15-ft parts and inventory room partitioned at the back, and a.

You're viewing:Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,400$25,550Save $3,150
or as low as $467/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Window
  • Office + Parts Partition
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-MOBILE-CONTRACTOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial storage layout.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Laid out on forklift turning radii. Mobile contractors running plumbing, HVAC, electrical, or pest-control crews use the 20×75 as a dispatch hub: two service vans staged at the gable doors, a 15-ft parts and inventory room partitioned at the back, and a small office with a storefront window facing the lot for customer pickups.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Racked inventory rowsForklift aisle + stagingReceiving + office corner20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · commercial storage layout

Racked inventory rows · Forklift aisle + staging · Receiving + office corner

Racked inventory rows at the front, forklift aisle + staging in the middle, receiving + office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~30 pallet positions. Insulated walls keep parts inventory and seasonal stock stable year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Office + Parts Partition. Size affords: pallet racking, dock or grade-level doors, office build-out.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub.

DAILY USEEveryday mobile contractor dispatch hub
Everyday mobile contractor dispatch hub
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mobile contractor dispatch hub.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmobile contractor dispatch hub + seasonal storage
mobile contractor dispatch hub + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$467/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $467/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub cost?

A 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub from Steel and Stud starts at $22,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $467/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud mobile contractor dispatch hub ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mobile contractor dispatch hub different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $467/month on a 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 RV Garage with Workshop

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 RV Garage with Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $20,550
12
20×75 RV Garage with Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,450$20,550SAVE $2,900
or $428/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75RV Garage with Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 RV Garage with Workshop, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheel trailers up to 45 feet long park inside a 20×75 RV garage and still have 25-30 feet of workshop space behind the rig. 14-16 ft leg heights clear roof-mounted A/C units.

You're viewing:RV Garage with Workshop·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,550$23,450Save $2,900
or as low as $428/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$20,550
24×75
wider
$26,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14x14 Roll-Up
  • Fits 45' Class A
  • 16' Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-RV-GARAGE-WORKSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheel trailers up to 45 feet long park inside a 20×75 RV garage and still have 25-30 feet of workshop space behind the rig.

Multiple RV baysService / wash bayStorage + workshop20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. 14-16 ft leg heights clear roof-mounted A/C units and slide-out awnings.

💡 Pro tip:Fits 45' Class A. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 RV Garage with Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Garage with Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Garage with Workshop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Garage with Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday rv garage with workshop
Everyday rv garage with workshop
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv garage with workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv garage with workshop + seasonal storage
rv garage with workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 RV Garage with Workshop — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$428/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 rv garage with workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $428/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Garage with Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 RV Garage with Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 RV Garage with Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Garage with Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Garage with Workshop also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Garage with Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 rv garage with workshop cost?

A 20×75 rv garage with workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $20,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $428/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 rv garage with workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv garage with workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 rv garage with workshop?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv garage with workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 rv garage with workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 rv garage with workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 rv garage with workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $428/month on a 20×75 rv garage with workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 rv garage with workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 rv garage with workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×75 rv garage with workshop for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv garage with workshop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Garage with Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$20,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 RV Garage with Workshop

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 RV Garage with Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $20,550
12
20×75 RV Garage with Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,450$20,550SAVE $2,900
or $428/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75RV Garage with Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 RV Garage with Workshop, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheel trailers up to 45 feet long park inside a 20×75 RV garage and still have 25-30 feet of workshop space behind the rig. 14-16 ft leg heights clear roof-mounted A/C units.

You're viewing:RV Garage with Workshop·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,550$23,450Save $2,900
or as low as $428/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$20,550
24×75
wider
$26,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • 14x14 Roll-Up
  • Fits 45' Class A
  • 16' Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-RV-GARAGE-WORKSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheel trailers up to 45 feet long park inside a 20×75 RV garage and still have 25-30 feet of workshop space behind the rig.

Multiple RV baysService / wash bayStorage + workshop20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. 14-16 ft leg heights clear roof-mounted A/C units and slide-out awnings.

💡 Pro tip:Fits 45' Class A. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 RV Garage with Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Garage with Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Garage with Workshop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Garage with Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday rv garage with workshop
Everyday rv garage with workshop
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv garage with workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv garage with workshop + seasonal storage
rv garage with workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 RV Garage with Workshop — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$428/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 rv garage with workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $428/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Garage with Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 RV Garage with Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 RV Garage with Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Garage with Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Garage with Workshop also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Garage with Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 rv garage with workshop cost?

A 20×75 rv garage with workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $20,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $428/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 rv garage with workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv garage with workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 rv garage with workshop?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv garage with workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 rv garage with workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 rv garage with workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 rv garage with workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $428/month on a 20×75 rv garage with workshop.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 rv garage with workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 rv garage with workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×75 rv garage with workshop for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv garage with workshop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Garage with Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud — From $20,550
12
20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,450$20,550SAVE $2,900
or $428/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Workshop and Hobby Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with serious hobbies (woodworking, automotive restoration, boat repair) use the 20×75 to stage a project at one end while keeping daily-driver vehicles parked at the other. Two roll-up doors give independent.

You're viewing:Workshop and Hobby Garage·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,550$23,450Save $2,900
or as low as $428/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$20,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Two Roll-Ups
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Hobby Shop Pricing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners with serious hobbies (woodworking, automotive restoration, boat repair) use the 20×75 to stage a project at one end while keeping daily-driver vehicles parked at the other.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Two roll-up doors give independent access.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Shop Pricing. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop and Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop and Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop and Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop and hobby garage
Everyday workshop and hobby garage
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop and hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop and hobby garage + seasonal storage
workshop and hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$428/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 workshop and hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $428/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop and Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop and Hobby Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop and Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop and Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage cost?

A 20×75 workshop and hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $20,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $428/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 workshop and hobby garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop and hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop and hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $428/month on a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 workshop and hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 workshop and hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 workshop and hobby garage typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop and Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$20,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud — From $20,550
12
20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$23,450$20,550SAVE $2,900
or $428/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Workshop and Hobby Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with serious hobbies (woodworking, automotive restoration, boat repair) use the 20×75 to stage a project at one end while keeping daily-driver vehicles parked at the other. Two roll-up doors give independent.

You're viewing:Workshop and Hobby Garage·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$20,550$23,450Save $2,900
or as low as $428/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$20,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Two Roll-Ups
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Hobby Shop Pricing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners with serious hobbies (woodworking, automotive restoration, boat repair) use the 20×75 to stage a project at one end while keeping daily-driver vehicles parked at the other.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Two roll-up doors give independent access.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Shop Pricing. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop and Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop and Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop and Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop and hobby garage
Everyday workshop and hobby garage
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop and hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop and hobby garage + seasonal storage
workshop and hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$428/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 workshop and hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $428/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop and Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Workshop and Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop and Hobby Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop and Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏛️ 20×75

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

20×75 storage building for self-storage operators configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop and Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage cost?

A 20×75 workshop and hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $20,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $428/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 workshop and hobby garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop and hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop and hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $428/month on a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 workshop and hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 workshop and hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×75 workshop and hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×75 workshop and hobby garage typically adds $12,000–$18,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop and Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$20,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators | Steel and Stud — From $22,500
12
20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,650$22,500SAVE $3,150
or $469/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators, engineered to code for assembly use.

Self-storage operators install the 20×75 as a row of 20×75 or 20×75 individual units (five to seven doors along one long wall) on small infill lots. The narrower 20-ft footprint fits parcels that won't take a 30-ft wide.

You're viewing:Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,500$25,650Save $3,150
or as low as $469/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Multiple Roll-Ups
  • Infill Lot Friendly
  • 8' Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your starter storage row.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Single-row drive-up configuration. Self-storage operators install the 20×75 as a row of 20×75 or 20×75 individual units (five to seven doors along one long wall) on small infill lots.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row (roll-up doors)Drive aisleKeypad entry + lighting20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · starter storage row

Unit row (roll-up doors) · Drive aisle · Keypad entry + lighting

Unit row (roll-up doors) at the front, drive aisle in the middle, keypad entry + lighting at the rear. Capacity: ~11 rentable 10×10-equivalent units. The narrower 20-ft footprint fits parcels that won't take a 30-ft wide row.

💡 Pro tip:Infill Lot Friendly. Size affords: partition kit, LED soffit lighting, gate keypad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building for self-storage operators
Everyday storage building for self-storage operators
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building for self-storage operators.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building for self-storage operators + seasonal storage
storage building for self-storage operators + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$469/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $469/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators cost?

A 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators from Steel and Stud starts at $22,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $469/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud storage building for self-storage operators ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building for self-storage operators different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $469/month on a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x75 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,500 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

1,500 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 75′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×75 steel building delivers 1,500 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators | Steel and Stud — From $22,500
12
20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,650$22,500SAVE $3,150
or $469/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×75Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators, engineered to code for assembly use.

Self-storage operators install the 20×75 as a row of 20×75 or 20×75 individual units (five to seven doors along one long wall) on small infill lots. The narrower 20-ft footprint fits parcels that won't take a 30-ft wide.

You're viewing:Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators·Size20×75·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,500$25,650Save $3,150
or as low as $469/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×75
20×75
this size
$22,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,500 sq ft enclosed
  • Multiple Roll-Ups
  • Infill Lot Friendly
  • 8' Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X75-STORAGE-BUILDINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your starter storage row.

20 feet wide × 75 feet long. Single-row drive-up configuration. Self-storage operators install the 20×75 as a row of 20×75 or 20×75 individual units (five to seven doors along one long wall) on small infill lots.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Unit row (roll-up doors)Drive aisleKeypad entry + lighting20′ × 75′ · 1,500 sq ft · starter storage row

Unit row (roll-up doors) · Drive aisle · Keypad entry + lighting

Unit row (roll-up doors) at the front, drive aisle in the middle, keypad entry + lighting at the rear. Capacity: ~11 rentable 10×10-equivalent units. The narrower 20-ft footprint fits parcels that won't take a 30-ft wide row.

💡 Pro tip:Infill Lot Friendly. Size affords: partition kit, LED soffit lighting, gate keypad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,500 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×75 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators spec sheet.

Width20'
Length75' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,500 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators.

DAILY USEEveryday storage building for self-storage operators
Everyday storage building for self-storage operators
1,500 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage building for self-storage operators.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage building for self-storage operators + seasonal storage
storage building for self-storage operators + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators — what makes it different.

1,500sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$469/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $469/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×75?

1,500 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 75′ footprint with 1,500 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,000–$18,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×75 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×75 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×75 Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×76×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,750+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators also viewed:

🏢 20×75

Workshop Kit for Tradespeople

20×75 workshop kit for tradespeople configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Kit for Tradespeople →
🏢 20×75

Commercial Garage for Auto Shops

20×75 commercial garage for auto shops configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Garage for Auto Shops →
🏭 20×75

Fabrication Shop

20×75 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×75

Metal Barndominium Shell

20×75 metal barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barndominium Shell →
🌾 20×75

Horse Barn with Stalls

20×75 horse barn with stalls configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Stalls →
🏢 20×75

Fleet Garage for Service Vans

20×75 fleet garage for service vans configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage for Service Vans →
🌾 20×75

Agricultural Barn

20×75 agricultural barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Barn →
🏭 20×75

Equipment Storage Building

20×75 equipment storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Storage Building →
🏢 20×75

Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub

20×75 mobile contractor dispatch hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mobile Contractor Dispatch Hub →
🎯 20×75

RV Garage with Workshop

20×75 rv garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage with Workshop →
🏡 20×75

Workshop and Hobby Garage

20×75 workshop and hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$20,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop and Hobby Garage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators questions, answered.

How much does a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators cost?

A 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators from Steel and Stud starts at $22,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $469/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud storage building for self-storage operators ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators?

Almost always for 1,500+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage building for self-storage operators different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $469/month on a 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators.

What warranty comes with the 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×75 storage building for self-storage operators pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Building for Self-Storage Operators quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Tandem Garage

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Tandem Garage | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Tandem Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Tandem Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Tandem Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners use the 20×80 metal building as a deep tandem garage that parks four full-size pickups end-to-end with a workbench at the back. The narrow footprint slips down a side yard where a 30-ft-wide build won't fit.

You're viewing:Tandem Garage·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9x8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-TANDEM-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners use the 20 by 80 metal building as a deep tandem garage that parks four full-size pickups end-to-end with a workbench at the back.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The narrow footprint slips down a side yard where a 30-ft-wide build won't fit.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Access. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Tandem Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tandem Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tandem Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tandem Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday tandem garage
Everyday tandem garage
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tandem garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtandem garage + seasonal storage
tandem garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Tandem Garage — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 tandem garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tandem Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Tandem Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Tandem Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tandem Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tandem Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tandem Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 tandem garage cost?

A 20×80 tandem garage from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 tandem garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud tandem garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 tandem garage?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tandem garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 tandem garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 tandem garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 tandem garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 tandem garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 tandem garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 tandem garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 tandem garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 tandem garage typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tandem Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Tandem Garage

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Tandem Garage | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Tandem Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Tandem Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Tandem Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners use the 20×80 metal building as a deep tandem garage that parks four full-size pickups end-to-end with a workbench at the back. The narrow footprint slips down a side yard where a 30-ft-wide build won't fit.

You're viewing:Tandem Garage·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 9x8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-TANDEM-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners use the 20 by 80 metal building as a deep tandem garage that parks four full-size pickups end-to-end with a workbench at the back.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The narrow footprint slips down a side yard where a 30-ft-wide build won't fit.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Access. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Tandem Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tandem Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tandem Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tandem Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday tandem garage
Everyday tandem garage
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tandem garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtandem garage + seasonal storage
tandem garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Tandem Garage — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 tandem garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tandem Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Tandem Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Tandem Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tandem Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tandem Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tandem Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 tandem garage cost?

A 20×80 tandem garage from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 tandem garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud tandem garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 tandem garage?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tandem garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 tandem garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 tandem garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 tandem garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 tandem garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 tandem garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 tandem garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 tandem garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 tandem garage typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tandem Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80RV Cover with Side Entry
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners spec a 20×80 metal carport at 14-16 ft of leg height to clear a 13'6" Class A motorhome plus rooftop AC. The 80-ft length covers a 40-ft coach plus a tow vehicle and a utility trailer. A 20×80 roll-up at the.

You're viewing:RV Cover with Side Entry·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16' Leg Height
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-RV-COVER-SIDE-ENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. RV owners spec a 20×80 metal carport at 14-16 ft of leg height to clear a 13'6" Class A motorhome plus rooftop AC.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. The 80-ft length covers a 40-ft coach plus a tow vehicle and a utility trailer.

💡 Pro tip:Class A Clearance. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Side Entry.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Side Entry spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Side Entry.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with side entry
Everyday rv cover with side entry
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with side entry.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with side entry + seasonal storage
rv cover with side entry + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 rv cover with side entry is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Side Entry shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Side Entry · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Side Entry also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Side Entry questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 rv cover with side entry cost?

A 20×80 rv cover with side entry from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 rv cover with side entry price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover with side entry ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 rv cover with side entry?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with side entry different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 rv cover with side entry need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 rv cover with side entry delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 rv cover with side entry without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 rv cover with side entry.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 rv cover with side entry?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 rv cover with side entry in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×80 rv cover with side entry for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with side entry to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Side Entry quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80RV Cover with Side Entry
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners spec a 20×80 metal carport at 14-16 ft of leg height to clear a 13'6" Class A motorhome plus rooftop AC. The 80-ft length covers a 40-ft coach plus a tow vehicle and a utility trailer. A 20×80 roll-up at the.

You're viewing:RV Cover with Side Entry·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16' Leg Height
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-RV-COVER-SIDE-ENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. RV owners spec a 20×80 metal carport at 14-16 ft of leg height to clear a 13'6" Class A motorhome plus rooftop AC.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. The 80-ft length covers a 40-ft coach plus a tow vehicle and a utility trailer.

💡 Pro tip:Class A Clearance. Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Side Entry.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Side Entry spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Side Entry.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with side entry
Everyday rv cover with side entry
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with side entry.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with side entry + seasonal storage
rv cover with side entry + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 rv cover with side entry is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Side Entry shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 RV Cover with Side Entry

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Side Entry · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Side Entry also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Side Entry questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 rv cover with side entry cost?

A 20×80 rv cover with side entry from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 rv cover with side entry price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover with side entry ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 rv cover with side entry?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with side entry different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 rv cover with side entry need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 rv cover with side entry delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 rv cover with side entry without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 rv cover with side entry.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 rv cover with side entry?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 rv cover with side entry in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×80 rv cover with side entry for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv cover with side entry to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Side Entry quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Fleet Garage

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud — From $23,800
12
20×80 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,150$23,800SAVE $3,350
or $496/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Fleet Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople and small fleet operators run four service vans end-to-end in a 20×80 commercial garage with a walk-in door between bays. The 12-14 ft eave clears box trucks and rooftop ladder racks. Two roll-up doors at.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,800$27,150Save $3,350
or as low as $496/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$23,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 14' Leg Height
  • Dual Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet-garage layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft doors for cube trucks and ambulances. Tradespeople and small fleet operators run four service vans end-to-end in a 20×80 commercial garage with a walk-in door between bays.

1 drive-in baysWash / service laneParts + dispatch office20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · fleet-garage layout

1 drive-in bays · Wash / service lane · Parts + dispatch office

1 drive-in bays at the front, wash / service lane in the middle, parts + dispatch office at the rear. Capacity: 1-vehicle fleet under roof. The 12-14 ft eave clears box trucks and rooftop ladder racks.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Cert. Size affords: floor drains per bay, compressor + lube reels, dispatch office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Fleet Garage — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$496/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $496/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 fleet garage cost?

A 20×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $23,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $496/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 fleet garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 fleet garage?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $496/month on a 20×80 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×80 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$23,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Fleet Garage

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Fleet Garage | Steel and Stud — From $23,800
12
20×80 Fleet Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,150$23,800SAVE $3,350
or $496/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Fleet Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Fleet Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople and small fleet operators run four service vans end-to-end in a 20×80 commercial garage with a walk-in door between bays. The 12-14 ft eave clears box trucks and rooftop ladder racks. Two roll-up doors at.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,800$27,150Save $3,350
or as low as $496/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$23,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 14' Leg Height
  • Dual Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-FLEET-GARAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet-garage layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft doors for cube trucks and ambulances. Tradespeople and small fleet operators run four service vans end-to-end in a 20×80 commercial garage with a walk-in door between bays.

1 drive-in baysWash / service laneParts + dispatch office20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · fleet-garage layout

1 drive-in bays · Wash / service lane · Parts + dispatch office

1 drive-in bays at the front, wash / service lane in the middle, parts + dispatch office at the rear. Capacity: 1-vehicle fleet under roof. The 12-14 ft eave clears box trucks and rooftop ladder racks.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Cert. Size affords: floor drains per bay, compressor + lube reels, dispatch office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Fleet Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage
Everyday fleet garage
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage + seasonal storage
fleet garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Fleet Garage — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$496/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 fleet garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $496/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Fleet Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Fleet Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 fleet garage cost?

A 20×80 fleet garage from Steel and Stud starts at $23,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $496/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 fleet garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 fleet garage?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 fleet garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 fleet garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 fleet garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $496/month on a 20×80 fleet garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 fleet garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 fleet garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×80 fleet garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Auto Repair Shop

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud — From $23,800
12
20×80 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,150$23,800SAVE $3,350
or $496/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Auto Repair Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Auto shops fit two 2-post lifts plus a tire changer and alignment bay across an 80-ft run. The 20-ft width hits the minimum for a 9-ft lift bay plus walk-around clearance. 12-gauge framing carries roof-mounted exhaust.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,800$27,150Save $3,350
or as low as $496/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$23,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 14' Eave
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay service shop.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft eaves clear a 9,000-lb lift at full rise. Auto shops fit two 2-post lifts plus a tire changer and alignment bay across an 80-ft run.

1 lift baysALIGNMENT / FLAT BAYParts + customer counter20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-bay service shop

1 lift bays · Alignment / flat bay · Parts + customer counter

1 lift bays at the front, alignment / flat bay in the middle, parts + customer counter at the rear. Capacity: 1 lifts + alignment rack. The 20-ft width hits the minimum for a 9-ft lift bay plus walk-around clearance.

💡 Pro tip:Lift-Ready Engineering. Size affords: alignment rack, tire machine + balancer, waiting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Auto Repair Shop — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$496/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $496/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×80 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $23,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $496/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 auto repair shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $496/month on a 20×80 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×80 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$23,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Auto Repair Shop

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Auto Repair Shop | Steel and Stud — From $23,800
12
20×80 Auto Repair Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,150$23,800SAVE $3,350
or $496/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Auto Repair Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Auto Repair Shop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Auto shops fit two 2-post lifts plus a tire changer and alignment bay across an 80-ft run. The 20-ft width hits the minimum for a 9-ft lift bay plus walk-around clearance. 12-gauge framing carries roof-mounted exhaust.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Shop·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,800$27,150Save $3,350
or as low as $496/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$23,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 14' Eave
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-AUTO-REPAIR-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay service shop.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 14-ft eaves clear a 9,000-lb lift at full rise. Auto shops fit two 2-post lifts plus a tire changer and alignment bay across an 80-ft run.

1 lift baysALIGNMENT / FLAT BAYParts + customer counter20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · multi-bay service shop

1 lift bays · Alignment / flat bay · Parts + customer counter

1 lift bays at the front, alignment / flat bay in the middle, parts + customer counter at the rear. Capacity: 1 lifts + alignment rack. The 20-ft width hits the minimum for a 9-ft lift bay plus walk-around clearance.

💡 Pro tip:Lift-Ready Engineering. Size affords: alignment rack, tire machine + balancer, waiting room.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Auto Repair Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair shop
Everyday auto repair shop
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair shop + seasonal storage
auto repair shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Auto Repair Shop — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$496/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 auto repair shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $496/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Auto Repair Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Auto Repair Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 auto repair shop cost?

A 20×80 auto repair shop from Steel and Stud starts at $23,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $496/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 auto repair shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 auto repair shop?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 auto repair shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 auto repair shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 auto repair shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $496/month on a 20×80 auto repair shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 auto repair shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 auto repair shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×80 auto repair shop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Equipment Shed

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud — From $22,600
12
20×80 Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,750$22,600SAVE $3,150
or $471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Equipment Shed
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Equipment Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Farmers shelter a tractor, hay wagon, sprayer, and grain cart end-to-end under one 20×80 prefab building. Open-side configurations skip end-wall doors and let crews drive straight through. 14-gauge framing keeps the kit.

You're viewing:Equipment Shed·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,600$25,750Save $3,150
or as low as $471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$22,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Sides
  • Galvalume
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-EQUIPMENT-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. Farmers shelter a tractor, hay wagon, sprayer, and grain cart end-to-end under one 20×80 prefab building.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof. Open-side configurations skip end-wall doors and let crews drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Bays. Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed
Everyday equipment shed
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed + seasonal storage
equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Equipment Shed — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 equipment shed cost?

A 20×80 equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $22,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 equipment shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 equipment shed?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $471/month on a 20×80 equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×80 equipment shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Equipment Shed

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Equipment Shed | Steel and Stud — From $22,600
12
20×80 Equipment Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,750$22,600SAVE $3,150
or $471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Equipment Shed
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Equipment Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Farmers shelter a tractor, hay wagon, sprayer, and grain cart end-to-end under one 20×80 prefab building. Open-side configurations skip end-wall doors and let crews drive straight through. 14-gauge framing keeps the kit.

You're viewing:Equipment Shed·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,600$25,750Save $3,150
or as low as $471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$22,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Sides
  • Galvalume
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-EQUIPMENT-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. Farmers shelter a tractor, hay wagon, sprayer, and grain cart end-to-end under one 20×80 prefab building.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑1 drive-in baysImplement + attachment rowsWorkbench + parts wall20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof. Open-side configurations skip end-wall doors and let crews drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Bays. Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Equipment Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment Shed spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment shed
Everyday equipment shed
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment shed + seasonal storage
equipment shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Equipment Shed — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 equipment shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Equipment Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Equipment Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment Shed also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 equipment shed cost?

A 20×80 equipment shed from Steel and Stud starts at $22,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 equipment shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 equipment shed?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 equipment shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 equipment shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 equipment shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $471/month on a 20×80 equipment shed.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 equipment shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 equipment shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×80 equipment shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Barndominium Wing

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Barndominium Wing | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Barndominium Wing
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Barndominium Wing
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Barndominium Wing, built for daily backyard use.

Barndo builders use the 20×80 as a long single-loaded wing — bedrooms and baths along one wall, hallway and utilities along the other. The narrow span keeps trusses simple and roof loads predictable. Pre-framed openings.

You're viewing:Barndominium Wing·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-BARNDOMINIUM-WINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. Barndo builders use the 20×80 as a long single-loaded wing — bedrooms and baths along one wall, hallway and utilities along the other.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay. The narrow span keeps trusses simple and roof loads predictable.

💡 Pro tip:Barndo Layout. Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Barndominium Wing in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Wing.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Wing spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Wing.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium wing
Everyday barndominium wing
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium wing.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium wing + seasonal storage
barndominium wing + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Barndominium Wing — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 barndominium wing is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Wing shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Barndominium Wing buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Barndominium Wing

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Wing · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Wing also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Wing questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 barndominium wing cost?

A 20×80 barndominium wing from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 barndominium wing price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium wing ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 barndominium wing?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium wing different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 barndominium wing need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 barndominium wing delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 barndominium wing without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 barndominium wing.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 barndominium wing?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 barndominium wing in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 barndominium wing add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 barndominium wing typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Wing quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Barndominium Wing

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Barndominium Wing | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Barndominium Wing
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Barndominium Wing
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Barndominium Wing, built for daily backyard use.

Barndo builders use the 20×80 as a long single-loaded wing — bedrooms and baths along one wall, hallway and utilities along the other. The narrow span keeps trusses simple and roof loads predictable. Pre-framed openings.

You're viewing:Barndominium Wing·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-BARNDOMINIUM-WINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your barndominium shell.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Split layout — living one end, shop the other. Barndo builders use the 20×80 as a long single-loaded wing — bedrooms and baths along one wall, hallway and utilities along the other.

2-bed sleeping wingGreat room + kitchenGarage / shop bay20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · barndominium shell

2-bed sleeping wing · Great room + kitchen · Garage / shop bay

2-bed sleeping wing at the front, great room + kitchen in the middle, garage / shop bay at the rear. Capacity: 2-bed home + attached shop bay. The narrow span keeps trusses simple and roof loads predictable.

💡 Pro tip:Barndo Layout. Size affords: shop partition wall, porch framing, spray-foam package.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Barndominium Wing in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Wing.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Wing spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Wing.

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium wing
Everyday barndominium wing
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium wing.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium wing + seasonal storage
barndominium wing + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Barndominium Wing — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 barndominium wing is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Wing shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Barndominium Wing buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Barndominium Wing

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Wing · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Wing also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Wing questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 barndominium wing cost?

A 20×80 barndominium wing from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 barndominium wing price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium wing ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 barndominium wing?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium wing different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 barndominium wing need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 barndominium wing delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 barndominium wing without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 barndominium wing.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 barndominium wing?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 barndominium wing in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 barndominium wing add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 barndominium wing typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Wing quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Workshop Run

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Workshop Run | Steel and Stud — From $23,800
12
20×80 Workshop Run
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,150$23,800SAVE $3,350
or $496/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Workshop Run
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Workshop Run, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Woodworkers and metal fabricators get an 80-ft uninterrupted bench run inside a 20×80 workshop kit. One end holds the table saw and outfeed; the other holds finishing and storage. A 20×80 roll-up mid-wall lets sheet.

You're viewing:Workshop Run·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,800$27,150Save $3,350
or as low as $496/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$23,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-WORKSHOP-RUNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Woodworkers and metal fabricators get an 80-ft uninterrupted bench run inside a 20×80 workshop kit.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. One end holds the table saw and outfeed; the other holds finishing and storage.

💡 Pro tip:80 ft Bench Run. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Workshop Run in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Run.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Run spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Run.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop run
Everyday workshop run
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop run.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop run + seasonal storage
workshop run + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Workshop Run — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$496/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 workshop run is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $496/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Run shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Workshop Run buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Workshop Run

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop Run · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Run also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Run questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 workshop run cost?

A 20×80 workshop run from Steel and Stud starts at $23,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $496/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 workshop run price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop run ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 workshop run?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop run different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 workshop run need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 workshop run delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 workshop run without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $496/month on a 20×80 workshop run.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 workshop run?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 workshop run in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×80 workshop run meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Run quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$23,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Workshop Run

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Workshop Run | Steel and Stud — From $23,800
12
20×80 Workshop Run
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,150$23,800SAVE $3,350
or $496/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Workshop Run
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Workshop Run, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Woodworkers and metal fabricators get an 80-ft uninterrupted bench run inside a 20×80 workshop kit. One end holds the table saw and outfeed; the other holds finishing and storage. A 20×80 roll-up mid-wall lets sheet.

You're viewing:Workshop Run·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,800$27,150Save $3,350
or as low as $496/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$23,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-WORKSHOP-RUNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Woodworkers and metal fabricators get an 80-ft uninterrupted bench run inside a 20×80 workshop kit.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. One end holds the table saw and outfeed; the other holds finishing and storage.

💡 Pro tip:80 ft Bench Run. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Workshop Run in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop Run.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop Run spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop Run.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop run
Everyday workshop run
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop run.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop run + seasonal storage
workshop run + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Workshop Run — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$496/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 workshop run is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $496/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop Run shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Workshop Run buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Workshop Run

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop Run · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop Run also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop Run questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 workshop run cost?

A 20×80 workshop run from Steel and Stud starts at $23,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $496/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 workshop run price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop run ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 workshop run?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop run different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 workshop run need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 workshop run delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 workshop run without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $496/month on a 20×80 workshop run.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 workshop run?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 workshop run in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×80 workshop run meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop Run quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack | Steel and Stud — From $22,600
12
20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,750$22,600SAVE $3,150
or $471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Horse Run-In with Tack
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack, built for farm and ranch demands.

Small horse operations use a 20×80 metal building as four 20×80 stalls plus a tack room and aisle. The 80-ft length hits four stalls and 32 ft of aisle without adding width. Sliding barn doors on each end let horses.

You're viewing:Horse Run-In with Tack·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,600$25,750Save $3,150
or as low as $471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$22,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-HORSE-RUN-IN-TACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Small horse operations use a 20×80 metal building as four 20×80 stalls plus a tack room and aisle.

5 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

5 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

5 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 5 horses + tack + feed. The 80-ft length hits four stalls and 32 ft of aisle without adding width.

💡 Pro tip:4-Stall Layout. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Run-In with Tack.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Run-In with Tack spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Run-In with Tack.

DAILY USEEveryday horse run-in with tack
Everyday horse run-in with tack
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse run-in with tack.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse run-in with tack + seasonal storage
horse run-in with tack + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 horse run-in with tack is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Run-In with Tack shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Run-In with Tack · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Run-In with Tack also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Run-In with Tack questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 horse run-in with tack cost?

A 20×80 horse run-in with tack from Steel and Stud starts at $22,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 horse run-in with tack price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse run-in with tack ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 horse run-in with tack?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse run-in with tack different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 horse run-in with tack need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 horse run-in with tack delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 horse run-in with tack without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $471/month on a 20×80 horse run-in with tack.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 horse run-in with tack?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 horse run-in with tack in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×80 horse run-in with tack stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Run-In with Tack quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$22,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack | Steel and Stud — From $22,600
12
20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,750$22,600SAVE $3,150
or $471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Horse Run-In with Tack
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack, built for farm and ranch demands.

Small horse operations use a 20×80 metal building as four 20×80 stalls plus a tack room and aisle. The 80-ft length hits four stalls and 32 ft of aisle without adding width. Sliding barn doors on each end let horses.

You're viewing:Horse Run-In with Tack·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$22,600$25,750Save $3,150
or as low as $471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$22,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-HORSE-RUN-IN-TACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Small horse operations use a 20×80 metal building as four 20×80 stalls plus a tack room and aisle.

5 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

5 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

5 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 5 horses + tack + feed. The 80-ft length hits four stalls and 32 ft of aisle without adding width.

💡 Pro tip:4-Stall Layout. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Run-In with Tack.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Run-In with Tack spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Run-In with Tack.

DAILY USEEveryday horse run-in with tack
Everyday horse run-in with tack
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse run-in with tack.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse run-in with tack + seasonal storage
horse run-in with tack + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 horse run-in with tack is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Run-In with Tack shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Horse Run-In with Tack

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Run-In with Tack · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Run-In with Tack also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Run-In with Tack questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 horse run-in with tack cost?

A 20×80 horse run-in with tack from Steel and Stud starts at $22,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 horse run-in with tack price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse run-in with tack ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 horse run-in with tack?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse run-in with tack different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 horse run-in with tack need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 horse run-in with tack delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 horse run-in with tack without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $471/month on a 20×80 horse run-in with tack.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 horse run-in with tack?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 horse run-in with tack in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×80 horse run-in with tack stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Run-In with Tack quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$22,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Batting Cage Building

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Batting Cage Building | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Batting Cage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Batting Cage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Batting Cage Building, built for hobby and recreational use.

Travel-ball families and training facilities run a regulation 70-ft batting cage inside an 80-ft span with room for a pitching machine and on-deck mat. The 20-ft width clears the cage netting plus side walkways. 14-16.

You're viewing:Batting Cage Building·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16' Leg Height
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-BATTING-CAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your batting cage building layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Travel-ball families and training facilities run a regulation 70-ft batting cage inside an 80-ft span with room for a pitching machine and on-deck mat.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · batting cage building layout

Batting Cage Building layout.

Travel-ball families and training facilities run a regulation 70-ft batting cage inside an 80-ft span with room for a pitching machine and on-deck mat. The 20-ft width clears the cage netting plus side walkways. 14-16 ft leg height keeps fly balls off the ceiling.

💡 Pro tip:70 ft Cage Fits.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Batting Cage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Batting Cage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Batting Cage Building spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Batting Cage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday batting cage building
Everyday batting cage building
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a batting cage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbatting cage building + seasonal storage
batting cage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Batting Cage Building — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 batting cage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Batting Cage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Batting Cage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Batting Cage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Batting Cage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Batting Cage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Batting Cage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 batting cage building cost?

A 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 batting cage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud batting cage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 batting cage building?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud batting cage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 batting cage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 batting cage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 batting cage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 batting cage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 batting cage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 batting cage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×80 batting cage building for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a batting cage building to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Batting Cage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Batting Cage Building

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Batting Cage Building | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Batting Cage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Batting Cage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Batting Cage Building, built for hobby and recreational use.

Travel-ball families and training facilities run a regulation 70-ft batting cage inside an 80-ft span with room for a pitching machine and on-deck mat. The 20-ft width clears the cage netting plus side walkways. 14-16.

You're viewing:Batting Cage Building·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 16' Leg Height
  • Insulated
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-BATTING-CAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your batting cage building layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Travel-ball families and training facilities run a regulation 70-ft batting cage inside an 80-ft span with room for a pitching machine and on-deck mat.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · batting cage building layout

Batting Cage Building layout.

Travel-ball families and training facilities run a regulation 70-ft batting cage inside an 80-ft span with room for a pitching machine and on-deck mat. The 20-ft width clears the cage netting plus side walkways. 14-16 ft leg height keeps fly balls off the ceiling.

💡 Pro tip:70 ft Cage Fits.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Batting Cage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Batting Cage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Batting Cage Building spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Batting Cage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday batting cage building
Everyday batting cage building
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a batting cage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbatting cage building + seasonal storage
batting cage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Batting Cage Building — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 batting cage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Batting Cage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Batting Cage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Batting Cage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Batting Cage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Batting Cage Building also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Batting Cage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 batting cage building cost?

A 20×80 batting cage building from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 batting cage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud batting cage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 batting cage building?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud batting cage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 batting cage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 batting cage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 batting cage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 batting cage building.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 batting cage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 batting cage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 20×80 batting cage building for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a batting cage building to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Batting Cage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Fabrication Shop

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $24,200
12
20×80 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,600$24,200SAVE $3,400
or $504/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Fabrication Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Welding and small fab shops run a 40-ft cutting table, a press brake, and a 20-ft assembly bench end-to-end. Stamped engineering supports a small jib crane on one column line. 26-gauge panels and a vertical roof handle.

You're viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,200$27,600Save $3,400
or as low as $504/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×75
smaller
$22,800
20×80
this size
$24,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Panels
  • Engineered Drawings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Welding and small fab shops run a 40-ft cutting table, a press brake, and a 20-ft assembly bench end-to-end.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Stamped engineering supports a small jib crane on one column line.

💡 Pro tip:Jib Crane Ready. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$504/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $504/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 fabrication shop cost?

A 20×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $504/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $504/month on a 20×80 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×80 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×80 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$24,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Fabrication Shop

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $24,200
12
20×80 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,600$24,200SAVE $3,400
or $504/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Fabrication Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Welding and small fab shops run a 40-ft cutting table, a press brake, and a 20-ft assembly bench end-to-end. Stamped engineering supports a small jib crane on one column line. 26-gauge panels and a vertical roof handle.

You're viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$24,200$27,600Save $3,400
or as low as $504/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×75
smaller
$22,800
20×80
this size
$24,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Panels
  • Engineered Drawings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Welding and small fab shops run a 40-ft cutting table, a press brake, and a 20-ft assembly bench end-to-end.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Stamped engineering supports a small jib crane on one column line.

💡 Pro tip:Jib Crane Ready. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$504/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $504/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 fabrication shop cost?

A 20×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $24,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $504/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $504/month on a 20×80 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 20×80 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 20×80 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$24,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Mini-Storage Run

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Mini-Storage Run | Steel and Stud — From $23,800
12
20×80 Mini-Storage Run
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,150$23,800SAVE $3,350
or $496/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Mini-Storage Run
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Mini-Storage Run, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small business owners build a back-to-back mini-storage run inside a 20×80 — sixteen 20×80 units split by a center wall, with roll-ups facing both long walls. The narrow footprint maximizes door-front frontage on a.

You're viewing:Mini-Storage Run·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,800$27,150Save $3,350
or as low as $496/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$23,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 16 Roll-Ups
  • Galvalume
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-MINI-STORAGE-RUNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial storage layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Laid out on forklift turning radii. Small business owners build a back-to-back mini-storage run inside a 20×80 — sixteen 20×80 units split by a center wall, with roll-ups facing both long walls.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Racked inventory rowsForklift aisle + stagingReceiving + office corner20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · commercial storage layout

Racked inventory rows · Forklift aisle + staging · Receiving + office corner

Racked inventory rows at the front, forklift aisle + staging in the middle, receiving + office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~32 pallet positions. The narrow footprint maximizes door-front frontage on a single drive aisle.

💡 Pro tip:16-Unit Layout. Size affords: pallet racking, dock or grade-level doors, office build-out.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Mini-Storage Run in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini-Storage Run.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini-Storage Run spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini-Storage Run.

DAILY USEEveryday mini-storage run
Everyday mini-storage run
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini-storage run.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini-storage run + seasonal storage
mini-storage run + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Mini-Storage Run — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$496/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 mini-storage run is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $496/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini-Storage Run shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Mini-Storage Run buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Mini-Storage Run

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mini-Storage Run · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini-Storage Run also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini-Storage Run questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 mini-storage run cost?

A 20×80 mini-storage run from Steel and Stud starts at $23,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $496/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 mini-storage run price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud mini-storage run ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 mini-storage run?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini-storage run different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 mini-storage run need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 mini-storage run delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 mini-storage run without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $496/month on a 20×80 mini-storage run.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 mini-storage run?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 mini-storage run in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×80 mini-storage run meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mini-Storage Run quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$23,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Mini-Storage Run

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Mini-Storage Run | Steel and Stud — From $23,800
12
20×80 Mini-Storage Run
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$27,150$23,800SAVE $3,350
or $496/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Mini-Storage Run
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Mini-Storage Run, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small business owners build a back-to-back mini-storage run inside a 20×80 — sixteen 20×80 units split by a center wall, with roll-ups facing both long walls. The narrow footprint maximizes door-front frontage on a.

You're viewing:Mini-Storage Run·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$23,800$27,150Save $3,350
or as low as $496/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$23,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 16 Roll-Ups
  • Galvalume
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-MINI-STORAGE-RUNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commercial storage layout.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Laid out on forklift turning radii. Small business owners build a back-to-back mini-storage run inside a 20×80 — sixteen 20×80 units split by a center wall, with roll-ups facing both long walls.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Racked inventory rowsForklift aisle + stagingReceiving + office corner20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · commercial storage layout

Racked inventory rows · Forklift aisle + staging · Receiving + office corner

Racked inventory rows at the front, forklift aisle + staging in the middle, receiving + office corner at the rear. Capacity: ~32 pallet positions. The narrow footprint maximizes door-front frontage on a single drive aisle.

💡 Pro tip:16-Unit Layout. Size affords: pallet racking, dock or grade-level doors, office build-out.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Mini-Storage Run in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Mini-Storage Run.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Mini-Storage Run spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Mini-Storage Run.

DAILY USEEveryday mini-storage run
Everyday mini-storage run
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a mini-storage run.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmini-storage run + seasonal storage
mini-storage run + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Mini-Storage Run — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$496/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 mini-storage run is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $496/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Mini-Storage Run shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Mini-Storage Run buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Mini-Storage Run

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Mini-Storage Run · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Mini-Storage Run also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏡 20×80

Hobby Shop + Loft

20×80 hobby shop + loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Shop + Loft →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Mini-Storage Run questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 mini-storage run cost?

A 20×80 mini-storage run from Steel and Stud starts at $23,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $496/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 mini-storage run price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud mini-storage run ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 mini-storage run?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud mini-storage run different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 mini-storage run need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 mini-storage run delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 mini-storage run without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $496/month on a 20×80 mini-storage run.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 mini-storage run?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 mini-storage run in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 20×80 mini-storage run meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Mini-Storage Run quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$23,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Hobby Shop + Loft
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists pair a 1,600 sq ft ground floor with a 20×80 mezzanine for parts storage and a small office. The 80-ft length leaves room for a project car bay, a fab bench, and a clean assembly area without.

You're viewing:Hobby Shop + Loft·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Mezzanine
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-HOBBY-SHOP-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. Hobbyists pair a 1,600 sq ft ground floor with a 20×80 mezzanine for parts storage and a small office.

Great-room loungeBAR + GAME ZONEGuest suite + bath + storage20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 64+ guests. The 80-ft length leaves room for a project car bay, a fab bench, and a clean assembly area without cross-contamination.

💡 Pro tip:400 sq ft Loft. Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Shop + Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Shop + Loft spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Shop + Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby shop + loft
Everyday hobby shop + loft
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby shop + loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby shop + loft + seasonal storage
hobby shop + loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 hobby shop + loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Shop + Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Shop + Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Shop + Loft also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Shop + Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 hobby shop + loft cost?

A 20×80 hobby shop + loft from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 hobby shop + loft price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby shop + loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 hobby shop + loft?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby shop + loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 hobby shop + loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 hobby shop + loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 hobby shop + loft without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 hobby shop + loft.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 hobby shop + loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 hobby shop + loft in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 hobby shop + loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 hobby shop + loft typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Shop + Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x80 metal building: free-standing fully enclosed view, 1,600 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft

1,600 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×80 steel building delivers 1,600 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft | Steel and Stud — From $21,950
12
20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$25,000$21,950SAVE $3,050
or $457/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×80Hobby Shop + Loft
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists pair a 1,600 sq ft ground floor with a 20×80 mezzanine for parts storage and a small office. The 80-ft length leaves room for a project car bay, a fab bench, and a clean assembly area without.

You're viewing:Hobby Shop + Loft·Size20×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$21,950$25,000Save $3,050
or as low as $457/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×80
20×80
this size
$21,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,600 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Mezzanine
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X80-HOBBY-SHOP-LOFTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your entertainment suite.

20 feet wide × 80 feet long. Zoned so the game side stays loud and the suite stays quiet. Hobbyists pair a 1,600 sq ft ground floor with a 20×80 mezzanine for parts storage and a small office.

Great-room loungeBAR + GAME ZONEGuest suite + bath + storage20′ × 80′ · 1,600 sq ft · entertainment suite

Great-room lounge · Bar + game zone · Guest suite + bath + storage

Great-room lounge at the front, bar + game zone in the middle, guest suite + bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: full entertaining suite, 64+ guests. The 80-ft length leaves room for a project car bay, a fab bench, and a clean assembly area without cross-contamination.

💡 Pro tip:400 sq ft Loft. Size affords: full bar, golf-sim bay, guest suite.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Shop + Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,600 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Shop + Loft spec sheet.

Width20'
Length80' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,600 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Shop + Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby shop + loft
Everyday hobby shop + loft
1,600 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby shop + loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby shop + loft + seasonal storage
hobby shop + loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft — what makes it different.

1,600sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$457/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×80 hobby shop + loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $457/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×80?

1,600 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 80′ footprint with 1,600 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $12,800–$19,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Shop + Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×80 Hobby Shop + Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Shop + Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$7,200+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Shop + Loft also viewed:

🏡 20×80

Tandem Garage

20×80 tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tandem Garage →
🎯 20×80

RV Cover with Side Entry

20×80 rv cover with side entry configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Side Entry →
🏢 20×80

Fleet Garage

20×80 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 20×80

Auto Repair Shop

20×80 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🌾 20×80

Equipment Shed

20×80 equipment shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed →
🏡 20×80

Barndominium Wing

20×80 barndominium wing configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Wing →
🏢 20×80

Workshop Run

20×80 workshop run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop Run →
🌾 20×80

Horse Run-In with Tack

20×80 horse run-in with tack configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$22,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In with Tack →
🎯 20×80

Batting Cage Building

20×80 batting cage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Batting Cage Building →
🏭 20×80

Fabrication Shop

20×80 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$24,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🏢 20×80

Mini-Storage Run

20×80 mini-storage run configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$23,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mini-Storage Run →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Shop + Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 20×80 hobby shop + loft cost?

A 20×80 hobby shop + loft from Steel and Stud starts at $21,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $457/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×80 hobby shop + loft price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby shop + loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×80 hobby shop + loft?

Almost always for 1,600+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby shop + loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×80 hobby shop + loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×80 hobby shop + loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×80 hobby shop + loft without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $457/month on a 20×80 hobby shop + loft.

What warranty comes with the 20×80 hobby shop + loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×80 hobby shop + loft in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×80 hobby shop + loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×80 hobby shop + loft typically adds $12,800–$19,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Shop + Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$21,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Three-Car Tandem Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with deep driveways pick this layout to park three sedans or two SUVs plus a motorcycle in a single bay. The 22-foot width gives you room to walk around an open driver's door, and 46 feet of depth fits a.

You're viewing:Three-Car Tandem Garage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-THREE-CAR-TANDEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners with deep driveways pick this layout to park three sedans or two SUVs plus a motorcycle in a single bay.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 22-foot width gives you room to walk around an open driver's door, and 46 feet of depth fits a tandem line plus a 6-foot tool wall at the rear.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Tandem Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Tandem Garage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Tandem Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car tandem garage
Everyday three-car tandem garage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car tandem garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car tandem garage + seasonal storage
three-car tandem garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 three-car tandem garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Tandem Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Tandem Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Tandem Garage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Tandem Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 three-car tandem garage cost?

A 22×46 three-car tandem garage from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 three-car tandem garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud three-car tandem garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 three-car tandem garage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car tandem garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 three-car tandem garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 three-car tandem garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 three-car tandem garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 three-car tandem garage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 three-car tandem garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 three-car tandem garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×46 three-car tandem garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×46 three-car tandem garage typically adds $8,096–$12,144 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Tandem Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Three-Car Tandem Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners with deep driveways pick this layout to park three sedans or two SUVs plus a motorcycle in a single bay. The 22-foot width gives you room to walk around an open driver's door, and 46 feet of depth fits a.

You're viewing:Three-Car Tandem Garage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-THREE-CAR-TANDEMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners with deep driveways pick this layout to park three sedans or two SUVs plus a motorcycle in a single bay.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 22-foot width gives you room to walk around an open driver's door, and 46 feet of depth fits a tandem line plus a 6-foot tool wall at the rear.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Tandem Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Tandem Garage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Tandem Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car tandem garage
Everyday three-car tandem garage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car tandem garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car tandem garage + seasonal storage
three-car tandem garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 three-car tandem garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Tandem Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Three-Car Tandem Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Tandem Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Tandem Garage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Tandem Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 three-car tandem garage cost?

A 22×46 three-car tandem garage from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 three-car tandem garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud three-car tandem garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 three-car tandem garage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car tandem garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 three-car tandem garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 three-car tandem garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 three-car tandem garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 three-car tandem garage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 three-car tandem garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 three-car tandem garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×46 three-car tandem garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×46 three-car tandem garage typically adds $8,096–$12,144 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Tandem Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46RV Cover with Rear Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

RV owners use the front 30 feet as a covered RV bay with a 22×46 roll-up, then partition the rear 16 feet into an enclosed workshop with its own walk-in door. The 22-foot width clears a Class A motorhome with the awning.

You're viewing:RV Cover with Rear Workshop·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • 14ft Legs
  • Partition Wall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-RV-COVER-REAR-WOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. RV owners use the front 30 feet as a covered RV bay with a 22×46 roll-up, then partition the rear 16 feet into an enclosed workshop with its own walk-in door.

RV bayDAILY DRIVERHookup / pre-wire22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 42ft + 1 daily driver. The 22-foot width clears a Class A motorhome with the awning out, and 14-foot legs handle most fifth-wheels and Class C rigs without modification.

💡 Pro tip:14ft Legs. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Rear Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Rear Workshop spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Rear Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with rear workshop
Everyday rv cover with rear workshop
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with rear workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with rear workshop + seasonal storage
rv cover with rear workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Rear Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Rear Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Rear Workshop also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Rear Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop cost?

A 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover with rear workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with rear workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop typically adds $8,096–$12,144 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Rear Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46RV Cover with Rear Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

RV owners use the front 30 feet as a covered RV bay with a 22×46 roll-up, then partition the rear 16 feet into an enclosed workshop with its own walk-in door. The 22-foot width clears a Class A motorhome with the awning.

You're viewing:RV Cover with Rear Workshop·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • 14ft Legs
  • Partition Wall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-RV-COVER-REAR-WOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. RV owners use the front 30 feet as a covered RV bay with a 22×46 roll-up, then partition the rear 16 feet into an enclosed workshop with its own walk-in door.

RV bayDAILY DRIVERHookup / pre-wire22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 42ft + 1 daily driver. The 22-foot width clears a Class A motorhome with the awning out, and 14-foot legs handle most fifth-wheels and Class C rigs without modification.

💡 Pro tip:14ft Legs. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Cover with Rear Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Cover with Rear Workshop spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Cover with Rear Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday rv cover with rear workshop
Everyday rv cover with rear workshop
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv cover with rear workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv cover with rear workshop + seasonal storage
rv cover with rear workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Cover with Rear Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 RV Cover with Rear Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Cover with Rear Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Cover with Rear Workshop also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Cover with Rear Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop cost?

A 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv cover with rear workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv cover with rear workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×46 rv cover with rear workshop typically adds $8,096–$12,144 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your RV Cover with Rear Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Small Horse Barn

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Small Horse Barn | Steel and Stud — From $15,600
12
22×46 Small Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,800$15,600SAVE $2,200
or $325/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Small Horse Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Small Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers configure this footprint as a 4-stall barn with a 10-foot center aisle and a feed/tack room at one end. The 46-foot length splits cleanly into 22×46 stalls plus a 22×46 tack room. Sliding barn doors at.

You're viewing:Small Horse Barn·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,600$17,800Save $2,200
or as low as $325/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$15,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • 12 GA Frame
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-SMALL-HORSE-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Hobby farmers configure this footprint as a 4-stall barn with a 10-foot center aisle and a feed/tack room at one end.

2 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

2 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

2 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 2 horses + tack + feed. The 46-foot length splits cleanly into 22×46 stalls plus a 22×46 tack room.

💡 Pro tip:Sliding Barn Doors. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Small Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday small horse barn
Everyday small horse barn
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall horse barn + seasonal storage
small horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Small Horse Barn — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$325/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 small horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $325/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Small Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Small Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Horse Barn also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 small horse barn cost?

A 22×46 small horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $15,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $325/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 small horse barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud small horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 small horse barn?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 small horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 small horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 small horse barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $325/month on a 22×46 small horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 small horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 small horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×46 small horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Small Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Small Horse Barn

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Small Horse Barn | Steel and Stud — From $15,600
12
22×46 Small Horse Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,800$15,600SAVE $2,200
or $325/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Small Horse Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Small Horse Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers configure this footprint as a 4-stall barn with a 10-foot center aisle and a feed/tack room at one end. The 46-foot length splits cleanly into 22×46 stalls plus a 22×46 tack room. Sliding barn doors at.

You're viewing:Small Horse Barn·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,600$17,800Save $2,200
or as low as $325/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$15,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • 12 GA Frame
  • R-13 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-SMALL-HORSE-BARNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Hobby farmers configure this footprint as a 4-stall barn with a 10-foot center aisle and a feed/tack room at one end.

2 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

2 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

2 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 2 horses + tack + feed. The 46-foot length splits cleanly into 22×46 stalls plus a 22×46 tack room.

💡 Pro tip:Sliding Barn Doors. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Small Horse Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Horse Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Horse Barn spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Horse Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday small horse barn
Everyday small horse barn
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small horse barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall horse barn + seasonal storage
small horse barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Small Horse Barn — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$325/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 small horse barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $325/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Horse Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Small Horse Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Small Horse Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Horse Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Horse Barn also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Horse Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 small horse barn cost?

A 22×46 small horse barn from Steel and Stud starts at $15,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $325/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 small horse barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud small horse barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 small horse barn?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small horse barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 small horse barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 small horse barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 small horse barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $325/month on a 22×46 small horse barn.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 small horse barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 small horse barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×46 small horse barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Small Horse Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage | Steel and Stud — From $16,800
12
22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,150$16,800SAVE $2,350
or $350/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Contractor Workshop and Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople buy this size as a working shop with bench space along one 46-foot wall and material/job-trailer storage opposite. The 12-foot legs clear a box truck or a 22-foot enclosed trailer through a 22×46 roll-up.

You're viewing:Contractor Workshop and Storage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,800$19,150Save $2,350
or as low as $350/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$16,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-CONTRACTOR-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Tradespeople buy this size as a working shop with bench space along one 46-foot wall and material/job-trailer storage opposite.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The 12-foot legs clear a box truck or a 22-foot enclosed trailer through a 22×46 roll-up.

💡 Pro tip:12 GA Upgrade. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Workshop and Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Workshop and Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Workshop and Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor workshop and storage
Everyday contractor workshop and storage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor workshop and storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor workshop and storage + seasonal storage
contractor workshop and storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$350/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 contractor workshop and storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $350/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Workshop and Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Workshop and Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Workshop and Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Workshop and Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage cost?

A 22×46 contractor workshop and storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $350/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 contractor workshop and storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor workshop and storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor workshop and storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $350/month on a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 contractor workshop and storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 contractor workshop and storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×46 contractor workshop and storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Workshop and Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage | Steel and Stud — From $16,800
12
22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,150$16,800SAVE $2,350
or $350/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Contractor Workshop and Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Tradespeople buy this size as a working shop with bench space along one 46-foot wall and material/job-trailer storage opposite. The 12-foot legs clear a box truck or a 22-foot enclosed trailer through a 22×46 roll-up.

You're viewing:Contractor Workshop and Storage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,800$19,150Save $2,350
or as low as $350/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$16,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-CONTRACTOR-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Tradespeople buy this size as a working shop with bench space along one 46-foot wall and material/job-trailer storage opposite.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The 12-foot legs clear a box truck or a 22-foot enclosed trailer through a 22×46 roll-up.

💡 Pro tip:12 GA Upgrade. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Workshop and Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Workshop and Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Workshop and Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor workshop and storage
Everyday contractor workshop and storage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor workshop and storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor workshop and storage + seasonal storage
contractor workshop and storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$350/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 contractor workshop and storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $350/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Workshop and Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Contractor Workshop and Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Workshop and Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Workshop and Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Workshop and Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage cost?

A 22×46 contractor workshop and storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $350/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 contractor workshop and storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud contractor workshop and storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor workshop and storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $350/month on a 22×46 contractor workshop and storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 contractor workshop and storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 contractor workshop and storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×46 contractor workshop and storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Workshop and Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Detached Garage with Loft

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Detached Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Detached Garage with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Detached Garage with Loft
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Detached Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners adding a detached garage with storage above spec 14- to 16-foot legs to fit a loft over the rear half. The 22-foot clear span supports an engineered mezzanine without interior posts. Two 22×46 roll-ups out.

You're viewing:Detached Garage with Loft·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
22×48
longer
$15,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 22ft Clear Span
  • Mezzanine Ready
  • Two 9x8 Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-DETACHED-GARAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners adding a detached garage with storage above spec 14- to 16-foot legs to fit a loft over the rear half.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 22-foot clear span supports an engineered mezzanine without interior posts.

💡 Pro tip:22ft Clear Span. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Detached Garage with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Garage with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday detached garage with loft
Everyday detached garage with loft
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached garage with loft + seasonal storage
detached garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Detached Garage with Loft — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 detached garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Detached Garage with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Detached Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Garage with Loft also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Garage with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 detached garage with loft cost?

A 22×46 detached garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 detached garage with loft price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud detached garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 detached garage with loft?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 detached garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 detached garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 detached garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 detached garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 detached garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 detached garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×46 detached garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×46 detached garage with loft typically adds $8,096–$12,144 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Detached Garage with Loft

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Detached Garage with Loft | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Detached Garage with Loft
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Detached Garage with Loft
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Detached Garage with Loft, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners adding a detached garage with storage above spec 14- to 16-foot legs to fit a loft over the rear half. The 22-foot clear span supports an engineered mezzanine without interior posts. Two 22×46 roll-ups out.

You're viewing:Detached Garage with Loft·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
22×48
longer
$15,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 22ft Clear Span
  • Mezzanine Ready
  • Two 9x8 Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-DETACHED-GARAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners adding a detached garage with storage above spec 14- to 16-foot legs to fit a loft over the rear half.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 22-foot clear span supports an engineered mezzanine without interior posts.

💡 Pro tip:22ft Clear Span. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Detached Garage with Loft in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Detached Garage with Loft.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Detached Garage with Loft spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Detached Garage with Loft.

DAILY USEEveryday detached garage with loft
Everyday detached garage with loft
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a detached garage with loft.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdetached garage with loft + seasonal storage
detached garage with loft + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Detached Garage with Loft — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 detached garage with loft is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Detached Garage with Loft shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Detached Garage with Loft buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Detached Garage with Loft

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Detached Garage with Loft · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Detached Garage with Loft also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Detached Garage with Loft questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 detached garage with loft cost?

A 22×46 detached garage with loft from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 detached garage with loft price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud detached garage with loft ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 detached garage with loft?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud detached garage with loft different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 detached garage with loft need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 detached garage with loft delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 detached garage with loft without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 detached garage with loft.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 detached garage with loft?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 detached garage with loft in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×46 detached garage with loft add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×46 detached garage with loft typically adds $8,096–$12,144 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Detached Garage with Loft quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Man Cave or She Shed Combo
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo, built for hobby and recreational use.

Couples splitting the footprint partition the building into a 22×46 enclosed living area with insulation, drywall-ready studs, and storefront windows, then leave 22×46 as a covered patio or workshop bay. R-19 fiberglass.

You're viewing:Man Cave or She Shed Combo·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Plumbing wall placed for bar + bath back-to-back. Couples splitting the footprint partition the building into a 22×46 enclosed living area with insulation, drywall-ready studs, and storefront windows, then leave 22×46 as a covered patio or workshop bay.

Main loungeWet bar / kitchenetteBath + storage22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 40 guests. R-19 fiberglass batt and a mini-split make the enclosed half year-round usable.

💡 Pro tip:Storefront Windows. Size affords: wet bar, half bath, media wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave or She Shed Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave or She Shed Combo spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave or She Shed Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave or she shed combo
Everyday man cave or she shed combo
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave or she shed combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave or she shed combo + seasonal storage
man cave or she shed combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 man cave or she shed combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave or She Shed Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave or She Shed Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave or She Shed Combo also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave or She Shed Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo cost?

A 22×46 man cave or she shed combo from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 man cave or she shed combo price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave or she shed combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave or she shed combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 man cave or she shed combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 man cave or she shed combo in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×46 man cave or she shed combo for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave or she shed combo to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave or She Shed Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Man Cave or She Shed Combo
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo, built for hobby and recreational use.

Couples splitting the footprint partition the building into a 22×46 enclosed living area with insulation, drywall-ready studs, and storefront windows, then leave 22×46 as a covered patio or workshop bay. R-19 fiberglass.

You're viewing:Man Cave or She Shed Combo·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Plumbing wall placed for bar + bath back-to-back. Couples splitting the footprint partition the building into a 22×46 enclosed living area with insulation, drywall-ready studs, and storefront windows, then leave 22×46 as a covered patio or workshop bay.

Main loungeWet bar / kitchenetteBath + storage22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 40 guests. R-19 fiberglass batt and a mini-split make the enclosed half year-round usable.

💡 Pro tip:Storefront Windows. Size affords: wet bar, half bath, media wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave or She Shed Combo.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave or She Shed Combo spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave or She Shed Combo.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave or she shed combo
Everyday man cave or she shed combo
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave or she shed combo.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave or she shed combo + seasonal storage
man cave or she shed combo + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 man cave or she shed combo is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave or She Shed Combo shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Man Cave or She Shed Combo

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave or She Shed Combo · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave or She Shed Combo also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave or She Shed Combo questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo cost?

A 22×46 man cave or she shed combo from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 man cave or she shed combo price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave or she shed combo ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave or she shed combo different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 man cave or she shed combo.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 man cave or she shed combo?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 man cave or she shed combo in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×46 man cave or she shed combo for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave or she shed combo to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave or She Shed Combo quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage | Steel and Stud — From $15,600
12
22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,800$15,600SAVE $2,200
or $325/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Equipment and Hay Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Rural property owners store a tractor, implements, and round bales under one roof. Open one 46-foot side as a drive-through lean-to for hay, enclose the other three sides for tools and a small shop. The 14-foot legs.

You're viewing:Equipment and Hay Storage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,600$17,800Save $2,200
or as low as $325/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$15,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Side
  • 14ft Legs
  • Gravel Floor OK
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-EQUIPMENT-HAY-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. 14-ft clearance takes a loaded bale spear. Rural property owners store a tractor, implements, and round bales under one roof.

Bale stack rowsFEED ALLEYTractor access bay22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Bale stack rows · Feed alley · Tractor access bay

Bale stack rows at the front, feed alley in the middle, tractor access bay at the rear. Capacity: ~189 sq bales or 9 round bales. Open one 46-foot side as a drive-through lean-to for hay, enclose the other three sides for tools and a small shop.

💡 Pro tip:14ft Legs. Size affords: drive-through doors, lean-to feed alley, grain bin pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment and Hay Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment and Hay Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment and Hay Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment and hay storage
Everyday equipment and hay storage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment and hay storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment and hay storage + seasonal storage
equipment and hay storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$325/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 equipment and hay storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $325/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment and Hay Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment and Hay Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment and Hay Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment and Hay Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 equipment and hay storage cost?

A 22×46 equipment and hay storage from Steel and Stud starts at $15,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $325/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 equipment and hay storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment and hay storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 equipment and hay storage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment and hay storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 equipment and hay storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 equipment and hay storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 equipment and hay storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $325/month on a 22×46 equipment and hay storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 equipment and hay storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 equipment and hay storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×46 equipment and hay storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment and Hay Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$15,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage | Steel and Stud — From $15,600
12
22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,800$15,600SAVE $2,200
or $325/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Equipment and Hay Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Rural property owners store a tractor, implements, and round bales under one roof. Open one 46-foot side as a drive-through lean-to for hay, enclose the other three sides for tools and a small shop. The 14-foot legs.

You're viewing:Equipment and Hay Storage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$15,600$17,800Save $2,200
or as low as $325/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$15,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Side
  • 14ft Legs
  • Gravel Floor OK
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-EQUIPMENT-HAY-STBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your hay-barn layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. 14-ft clearance takes a loaded bale spear. Rural property owners store a tractor, implements, and round bales under one roof.

Bale stack rowsFEED ALLEYTractor access bay22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · hay-barn layout

Bale stack rows · Feed alley · Tractor access bay

Bale stack rows at the front, feed alley in the middle, tractor access bay at the rear. Capacity: ~189 sq bales or 9 round bales. Open one 46-foot side as a drive-through lean-to for hay, enclose the other three sides for tools and a small shop.

💡 Pro tip:14ft Legs. Size affords: drive-through doors, lean-to feed alley, grain bin pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment and Hay Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment and Hay Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment and Hay Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment and hay storage
Everyday equipment and hay storage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment and hay storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment and hay storage + seasonal storage
equipment and hay storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$325/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 equipment and hay storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $325/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment and Hay Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Equipment and Hay Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment and Hay Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment and Hay Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment and Hay Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 equipment and hay storage cost?

A 22×46 equipment and hay storage from Steel and Stud starts at $15,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $325/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 equipment and hay storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment and hay storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 equipment and hay storage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment and hay storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 equipment and hay storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 equipment and hay storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 equipment and hay storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $325/month on a 22×46 equipment and hay storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 equipment and hay storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 equipment and hay storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×46 equipment and hay storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment and Hay Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$15,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Auto Repair Garage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Auto Repair Garage | Steel and Stud — From $16,800
12
22×46 Auto Repair Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,150$16,800SAVE $2,350
or $350/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Auto Repair Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Auto Repair Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Independent mechanics fit a 2-post lift in the front bay and a workbench plus parts storage in the rear. The 12-foot leg height clears most 9,000 lb lifts with a truck on the arms. Spec a 22×46 roll-up, a 22×46 walk-in.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Garage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,800$19,150Save $2,350
or as low as $350/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$16,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Lift-Ready Height
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • 30x30 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-AUTO-REPAIR-GARABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your one-bay auto shop.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. 12-ft ceiling gives full lift travel. Independent mechanics fit a 2-post lift in the front bay and a workbench plus parts storage in the rear.

Lift bayBench + tool wallParts shelving22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · one-bay auto shop

Lift bay · Bench + tool wall · Parts shelving

Lift bay at the front, bench + tool wall in the middle, parts shelving at the rear. Capacity: 1 two-post lift + bench work. The 12-foot leg height clears most 9,000 lb lifts with a truck on the arms.

💡 Pro tip:Lift-Ready Height. Size affords: two-post lift, compressor closet, waste-oil caddy.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Auto Repair Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Garage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair garage
Everyday auto repair garage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair garage + seasonal storage
auto repair garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Auto Repair Garage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$350/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 auto repair garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $350/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Auto Repair Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Auto Repair Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Garage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 auto repair garage cost?

A 22×46 auto repair garage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $350/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 auto repair garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 auto repair garage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 auto repair garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 auto repair garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 auto repair garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $350/month on a 22×46 auto repair garage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 auto repair garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 auto repair garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×46 auto repair garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Auto Repair Garage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Auto Repair Garage | Steel and Stud — From $16,800
12
22×46 Auto Repair Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,150$16,800SAVE $2,350
or $350/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Auto Repair Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Auto Repair Garage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Independent mechanics fit a 2-post lift in the front bay and a workbench plus parts storage in the rear. The 12-foot leg height clears most 9,000 lb lifts with a truck on the arms. Spec a 22×46 roll-up, a 22×46 walk-in.

You're viewing:Auto Repair Garage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,800$19,150Save $2,350
or as low as $350/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$16,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Lift-Ready Height
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • 30x30 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-AUTO-REPAIR-GARABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your one-bay auto shop.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. 12-ft ceiling gives full lift travel. Independent mechanics fit a 2-post lift in the front bay and a workbench plus parts storage in the rear.

Lift bayBench + tool wallParts shelving22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · one-bay auto shop

Lift bay · Bench + tool wall · Parts shelving

Lift bay at the front, bench + tool wall in the middle, parts shelving at the rear. Capacity: 1 two-post lift + bench work. The 12-foot leg height clears most 9,000 lb lifts with a truck on the arms.

💡 Pro tip:Lift-Ready Height. Size affords: two-post lift, compressor closet, waste-oil caddy.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Auto Repair Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Repair Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Repair Garage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Repair Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday auto repair garage
Everyday auto repair garage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto repair garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto repair garage + seasonal storage
auto repair garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Auto Repair Garage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$350/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 auto repair garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $350/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Repair Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Auto Repair Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Auto Repair Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Repair Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Repair Garage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Repair Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 auto repair garage cost?

A 22×46 auto repair garage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $350/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 auto repair garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto repair garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 auto repair garage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto repair garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 auto repair garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 auto repair garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 auto repair garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $350/month on a 22×46 auto repair garage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 auto repair garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 auto repair garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×46 auto repair garage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Repair Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Boat and Trailer Cover
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover, built for daily backyard use.

Lake-property owners cover a 24-foot bowrider on its trailer, plus a jet ski trailer alongside, with room left for kayaks and water-sports gear. The 22-foot width handles a wakeboard tower, and 46 feet of length leaves.

You're viewing:Boat and Trailer Cover·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Carport
  • Wakeboard Tower OK
  • 12ft Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-BOAT-TRAILER-COVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. Lake-property owners cover a 24-foot bowrider on its trailer, plus a jet ski trailer alongside, with room left for kayaks and water-sports gear.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 40ft + a second toy. The 22-foot width handles a wakeboard tower, and 46 feet of length leaves space for a workbench at the back end of the bay.

💡 Pro tip:Wakeboard Tower OK. Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and trailer cover
Everyday boat and trailer cover
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and trailer cover + seasonal storage
boat and trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 boat and trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 boat and trailer cover cost?

A 22×46 boat and trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 boat and trailer cover price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat and trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 boat and trailer cover?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 boat and trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 boat and trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 boat and trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 boat and trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 boat and trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 boat and trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×46 boat and trailer cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×46 boat and trailer cover typically adds $8,096–$12,144 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Boat and Trailer Cover
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover, built for daily backyard use.

Lake-property owners cover a 24-foot bowrider on its trailer, plus a jet ski trailer alongside, with room left for kayaks and water-sports gear. The 22-foot width handles a wakeboard tower, and 46 feet of length leaves.

You're viewing:Boat and Trailer Cover·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Carport
  • Wakeboard Tower OK
  • 12ft Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-BOAT-TRAILER-COVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. Lake-property owners cover a 24-foot bowrider on its trailer, plus a jet ski trailer alongside, with room left for kayaks and water-sports gear.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 40ft + a second toy. The 22-foot width handles a wakeboard tower, and 46 feet of length leaves space for a workbench at the back end of the bay.

💡 Pro tip:Wakeboard Tower OK. Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat and Trailer Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat and Trailer Cover spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat and Trailer Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday boat and trailer cover
Everyday boat and trailer cover
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat and trailer cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat and trailer cover + seasonal storage
boat and trailer cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 boat and trailer cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat and Trailer Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Boat and Trailer Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat and Trailer Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat and Trailer Cover also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat and Trailer Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 boat and trailer cover cost?

A 22×46 boat and trailer cover from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 boat and trailer cover price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat and trailer cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 boat and trailer cover?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat and trailer cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 boat and trailer cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 boat and trailer cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 boat and trailer cover without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 boat and trailer cover.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 boat and trailer cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 boat and trailer cover in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×46 boat and trailer cover add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×46 boat and trailer cover typically adds $8,096–$12,144 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Boat and Trailer Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Light Fabrication Shop

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Light Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $17,200
12
22×46 Light Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,600$17,200SAVE $2,400
or $358/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Light Fabrication Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Light Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Welders and metal fab shops use the 1012 sq ft as a single open bay with a roll-up at each gable end for drive-through material flow. The 12-gauge frame and 26-gauge walls handle hot work, and 14-foot legs clear an.

You're viewing:Light Fabrication Shop·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,200$19,600Save $2,400
or as low as $358/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$17,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Walls
  • Drive-Through
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-LIGHT-FABRICATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Welders and metal fab shops use the 1012 sq ft as a single open bay with a roll-up at each gable end for drive-through material flow.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The 12-gauge frame and 26-gauge walls handle hot work, and 14-foot legs clear an overhead crane rail along the 46-foot run.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Light Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Light Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Light Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Light Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday light fabrication shop
Everyday light fabrication shop
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a light fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlight fabrication shop + seasonal storage
light fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Light Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$358/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 light fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $358/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Light Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Light Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Light Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Light Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Light Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Light Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 light fabrication shop cost?

A 22×46 light fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $17,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $358/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 light fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud light fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 light fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud light fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 light fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 light fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 light fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $358/month on a 22×46 light fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 light fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 light fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×46 light fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 22×46 light fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Light Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$17,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Light Fabrication Shop

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Light Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $17,200
12
22×46 Light Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,600$17,200SAVE $2,400
or $358/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Light Fabrication Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Light Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Welders and metal fab shops use the 1012 sq ft as a single open bay with a roll-up at each gable end for drive-through material flow. The 12-gauge frame and 26-gauge walls handle hot work, and 14-foot legs clear an.

You're viewing:Light Fabrication Shop·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$17,200$19,600Save $2,400
or as low as $358/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$17,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Walls
  • Drive-Through
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-LIGHT-FABRICATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Welders and metal fab shops use the 1012 sq ft as a single open bay with a roll-up at each gable end for drive-through material flow.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The 12-gauge frame and 26-gauge walls handle hot work, and 14-foot legs clear an overhead crane rail along the 46-foot run.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Light Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Light Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Light Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Light Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday light fabrication shop
Everyday light fabrication shop
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a light fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlight fabrication shop + seasonal storage
light fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Light Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$358/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 light fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $358/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Light Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Light Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Light Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Light Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Light Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Light Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 light fabrication shop cost?

A 22×46 light fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $17,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $358/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 light fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud light fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 light fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud light fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 light fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 light fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 light fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $358/month on a 22×46 light fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 light fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 light fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×46 light fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 22×46 light fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Light Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$17,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Home Gym and Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

Homeowners build out the full 1012 sq ft as a climate-controlled home gym with a rubber-floor lifting area, a cardio zone, and a recovery/sauna corner. R-19 insulation and a mini-split keep it usable in both summer and.

You're viewing:Home Gym and Hobby Space·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Climate Control
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Storefront Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-HOME-GYM-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garage-gym layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Ceiling height clears wall balls and rope climbs. Homeowners build out the full 1012 sq ft as a climate-controlled home gym with a rubber-floor lifting area, a cardio zone, and a recovery/sauna corner.

Lifting platformsCardio rowTurf / sled lane22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · garage-gym layout

Lifting platforms · Cardio row · Turf / sled lane

Lifting platforms at the front, cardio row in the middle, turf / sled lane at the rear. Capacity: small-group training, ~22 at once. R-19 insulation and a mini-split keep it usable in both summer and winter.

💡 Pro tip:Climate Control. Size affords: sled turf lane, rig bolted to slab, fan wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym and Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym and Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym and Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym and hobby space
Everyday home gym and hobby space
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym and hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym and hobby space + seasonal storage
home gym and hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 home gym and hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym and Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Gym and Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym and Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym and Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 home gym and hobby space cost?

A 22×46 home gym and hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 home gym and hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym and hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 home gym and hobby space?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym and hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 home gym and hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 home gym and hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 home gym and hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 home gym and hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 home gym and hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 home gym and hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×46 home gym and hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a home gym and hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym and Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $14,950
12
22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$17,050$14,950SAVE $2,100
or $311/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Home Gym and Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space, built for hobby and recreational use.

Homeowners build out the full 1012 sq ft as a climate-controlled home gym with a rubber-floor lifting area, a cardio zone, and a recovery/sauna corner. R-19 insulation and a mini-split keep it usable in both summer and.

You're viewing:Home Gym and Hobby Space·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,950$17,050Save $2,100
or as low as $311/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$14,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • Climate Control
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Storefront Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-HOME-GYM-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your garage-gym layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Ceiling height clears wall balls and rope climbs. Homeowners build out the full 1012 sq ft as a climate-controlled home gym with a rubber-floor lifting area, a cardio zone, and a recovery/sauna corner.

Lifting platformsCardio rowTurf / sled lane22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · garage-gym layout

Lifting platforms · Cardio row · Turf / sled lane

Lifting platforms at the front, cardio row in the middle, turf / sled lane at the rear. Capacity: small-group training, ~22 at once. R-19 insulation and a mini-split keep it usable in both summer and winter.

💡 Pro tip:Climate Control. Size affords: sled turf lane, rig bolted to slab, fan wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Gym and Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Gym and Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Gym and Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday home gym and hobby space
Everyday home gym and hobby space
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home gym and hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome gym and hobby space + seasonal storage
home gym and hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$311/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 home gym and hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $311/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Gym and Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Home Gym and Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Gym and Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Gym and Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🏛️ 22×46

Church or Community Storage

22×46 church or community storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Gym and Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 home gym and hobby space cost?

A 22×46 home gym and hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $14,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $311/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 home gym and hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home gym and hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 home gym and hobby space?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home gym and hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 home gym and hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 home gym and hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 home gym and hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $311/month on a 22×46 home gym and hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 home gym and hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 home gym and hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×46 home gym and hobby space for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a home gym and hobby space to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Home Gym and Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Church or Community Storage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Church or Community Storage | Steel and Stud — From $16,900
12
22×46 Church or Community Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Church or Community Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Church or Community Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Small congregations and HOAs use the building for event chairs, tables, holiday decor, and grounds equipment. A 22×46 roll-up handles a riding mower or a small trailer, a partition wall separates equipment from indoor.

You're viewing:Church or Community Storage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • Partition Wall
  • Code-Stamped
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-CHURCH-COMMUNITYBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your chapel layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Intimate sanctuary, single-aisle layout. Small congregations and HOAs use the building for event chairs, tables, holiday decor, and grounds equipment.

Altar / pulpitPew areaFOYER22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · chapel layout

Altar / pulpit · Pew area · Foyer

Altar / pulpit at the front, pew area in the middle, foyer at the rear. Capacity: seats ~101. A 22×46 roll-up handles a riding mower or a small trailer, a partition wall separates equipment from indoor storage, and 12-gauge framing meets most municipal code requirements without an upgrade quote.

💡 Pro tip:Code-Stamped. Size affords: choir stand, narthex.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Church or Community Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church or Community Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church or Community Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church or Community Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday church or community storage
Everyday church or community storage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church or community storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch or community storage + seasonal storage
church or community storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Church or Community Storage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 church or community storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church or Community Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Church or Community Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Church or Community Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church or Community Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church or Community Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church or Community Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 church or community storage cost?

A 22×46 church or community storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 church or community storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud church or community storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 church or community storage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church or community storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 church or community storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 church or community storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 church or community storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 22×46 church or community storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 church or community storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 church or community storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×46 church or community storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church or Community Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x46 metal building: three-quarter perspective angle, 1,012 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×46 Church or Community Storage

1,012 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 46′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×46 steel building delivers 1,012 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×46 Church or Community Storage | Steel and Stud — From $16,900
12
22×46 Church or Community Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×46Church or Community Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×46 Church or Community Storage, engineered to code for assembly use.

Small congregations and HOAs use the building for event chairs, tables, holiday decor, and grounds equipment. A 22×46 roll-up handles a riding mower or a small trailer, a partition wall separates equipment from indoor.

You're viewing:Church or Community Storage·Size22×46·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×46
22×46
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,012 sq ft enclosed
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • Partition Wall
  • Code-Stamped
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X46-CHURCH-COMMUNITYBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your chapel layout.

22 feet wide × 46 feet long. Intimate sanctuary, single-aisle layout. Small congregations and HOAs use the building for event chairs, tables, holiday decor, and grounds equipment.

Altar / pulpitPew areaFOYER22′ × 46′ · 1,012 sq ft · chapel layout

Altar / pulpit · Pew area · Foyer

Altar / pulpit at the front, pew area in the middle, foyer at the rear. Capacity: seats ~101. A 22×46 roll-up handles a riding mower or a small trailer, a partition wall separates equipment from indoor storage, and 12-gauge framing meets most municipal code requirements without an upgrade quote.

💡 Pro tip:Code-Stamped. Size affords: choir stand, narthex.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×46 Church or Community Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Church or Community Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,012 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×46 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Church or Community Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length46' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,012 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Church or Community Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday church or community storage
Everyday church or community storage
1,012 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a church or community storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchurch or community storage + seasonal storage
church or community storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×46 Church or Community Storage — what makes it different.

1,012sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×46 church or community storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×46?

1,012 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 46′ footprint with 1,012 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,096–$12,144 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Church or Community Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×46 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×46 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×46 Church or Community Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×46 Church or Community Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Church or Community Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×47×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,554+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Church or Community Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×46

Three-Car Tandem Garage

22×46 three-car tandem garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Car Tandem Garage →
🏡 22×46

RV Cover with Rear Workshop

22×46 rv cover with rear workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Rear Workshop →
🌾 22×46

Small Horse Barn

22×46 small horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Horse Barn →
🏢 22×46

Contractor Workshop and Storage

22×46 contractor workshop and storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop and Storage →
🏡 22×46

Detached Garage with Loft

22×46 detached garage with loft configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage with Loft →
🎯 22×46

Man Cave or She Shed Combo

22×46 man cave or she shed combo configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave or She Shed Combo →
🌾 22×46

Equipment and Hay Storage

22×46 equipment and hay storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$15,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment and Hay Storage →
🏢 22×46

Auto Repair Garage

22×46 auto repair garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Garage →
🏡 22×46

Boat and Trailer Cover

22×46 boat and trailer cover configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat and Trailer Cover →
🏭 22×46

Light Fabrication Shop

22×46 light fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$17,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Light Fabrication Shop →
🎯 22×46

Home Gym and Hobby Space

22×46 home gym and hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym and Hobby Space →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Church or Community Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×46 church or community storage cost?

A 22×46 church or community storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×46 church or community storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud church or community storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×46 church or community storage?

Almost always for 1,012+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud church or community storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×46 church or community storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×46 church or community storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×46 church or community storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 22×46 church or community storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×46 church or community storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×46 church or community storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×46 church or community storage pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Church or Community Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners who want more than a basic two-car garage spec a 22×50 to fit two full-size SUVs in the front 25 feet and dedicate the back 25 feet to a workshop. Two 22×50 roll-up doors on the 22-foot gable end, a walk-in.

You're viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners who want more than a basic two-car garage spec a 22×50 to fit two full-size SUVs in the front 25 feet and dedicate the back 25 feet to a workshop.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Two 22×50 roll-up doors on the 22-foot gable end, a walk-in personnel door on the side, and you've got a layout that handles parking and projects without compromise.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage with workshop bay
Everyday two-car detached garage with workshop bay
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage with workshop bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage with workshop bay + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage with workshop bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay also viewed:

🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay cost?

A 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage with workshop bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage with workshop bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay typically adds $8,800–$13,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners who want more than a basic two-car garage spec a 22×50 to fit two full-size SUVs in the front 25 feet and dedicate the back 25 feet to a workshop. Two 22×50 roll-up doors on the 22-foot gable end, a walk-in.

You're viewing:Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-TWO-CAR-DETACHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners who want more than a basic two-car garage spec a 22×50 to fit two full-size SUVs in the front 25 feet and dedicate the back 25 feet to a workshop.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Two 22×50 roll-up doors on the 22-foot gable end, a walk-in personnel door on the side, and you've got a layout that handles parking and projects without compromise.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday two-car detached garage with workshop bay
Everyday two-car detached garage with workshop bay
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two-car detached garage with workshop bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo-car detached garage with workshop bay + seasonal storage
two-car detached garage with workshop bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay also viewed:

🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay cost?

A 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud two-car detached garage with workshop bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two-car detached garage with workshop bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay typically adds $8,800–$13,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with a 35-40 foot Class A motorhome need 14-foot leg heights minimum to clear the roof AC, plus enough depth to close the door behind a slide-out. The 22×50 fits a 38-foot coach with 12 feet of bonus storage.

You're viewing:RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • 14' Leg Height
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-RV-GARAGE-CLASS-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. RV owners with a 35-40 foot Class A motorhome need 14-foot leg heights minimum to clear the roof AC, plus enough depth to close the door behind a slide-out.

RV bayDaily driverHookup / pre-wire22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver. The 22×50 fits a 38-foot coach with 12 feet of bonus storage behind it for kayaks, generators, and seasonal gear.

💡 Pro tip:14' Leg Height. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes.

DAILY USEEveryday rv garage for class a motorhomes
Everyday rv garage for class a motorhomes
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv garage for class a motorhomes.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv garage for class a motorhomes + seasonal storage
rv garage for class a motorhomes + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes cost?

A 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv garage for class a motorhomes ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv garage for class a motorhomes different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv garage for class a motorhomes to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes, built for hobby and recreational use.

RV owners with a 35-40 foot Class A motorhome need 14-foot leg heights minimum to clear the roof AC, plus enough depth to close the door behind a slide-out. The 22×50 fits a 38-foot coach with 12 feet of bonus storage.

You're viewing:RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12x12 Roll-Up
  • 14' Leg Height
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-RV-GARAGE-CLASS-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your RV-cover layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. 14-ft sidewalls fit slide-outs deployed. RV owners with a 35-40 foot Class A motorhome need 14-foot leg heights minimum to clear the roof AC, plus enough depth to close the door behind a slide-out.

RV bayDaily driverHookup / pre-wire22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · RV-cover layout

RV bay · Daily driver · Hookup / pre-wire

RV bay at the front, daily driver in the middle, hookup / pre-wire at the rear. Capacity: 1 Class A up to 45ft + 1 daily driver. The 22×50 fits a 38-foot coach with 12 feet of bonus storage behind it for kayaks, generators, and seasonal gear.

💡 Pro tip:14' Leg Height. Size affords: 50A hookup, sewer dump, overhead lighting.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes.

DAILY USEEveryday rv garage for class a motorhomes
Everyday rv garage for class a motorhomes
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv garage for class a motorhomes.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv garage for class a motorhomes + seasonal storage
rv garage for class a motorhomes + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes cost?

A 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv garage for class a motorhomes ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv garage for class a motorhomes different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv garage for class a motorhomes to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud — From $18,100
12
22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,650$18,100SAVE $2,550
or $377/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 22×50 as a base of operations: one bay for the work van, a parts wall along the 50-foot sidewall, and an office partition near the entrance. The 22-foot width keeps.

You're viewing:Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,100$20,650Save $2,550
or as low as $377/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$18,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Office Partition
  • Insulated Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-TRADESPERSON-WORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 22×50 as a base of operations: one bay for the work van, a parts wall along the 50-foot sidewall, and an office partition near the entrance.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The 22-foot width keeps the build affordable while 50 feet of depth handles inventory racking and a mid-size box truck.

💡 Pro tip:Office Partition. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tradesperson workshop & equipment storage
Everyday tradesperson workshop & equipment storage
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tradesperson workshop & equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtradesperson workshop & equipment storage + seasonal storage
tradesperson workshop & equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$377/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $377/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage cost?

A 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $18,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $377/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud tradesperson workshop & equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tradesperson workshop & equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $377/month on a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$18,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud — From $18,100
12
22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,650$18,100SAVE $2,550
or $377/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 22×50 as a base of operations: one bay for the work van, a parts wall along the 50-foot sidewall, and an office partition near the entrance. The 22-foot width keeps.

You're viewing:Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,100$20,650Save $2,550
or as low as $377/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$18,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • Office Partition
  • Insulated Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-TRADESPERSON-WORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Plumbers, electricians, and HVAC contractors use the 22×50 as a base of operations: one bay for the work van, a parts wall along the 50-foot sidewall, and an office partition near the entrance.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The 22-foot width keeps the build affordable while 50 feet of depth handles inventory racking and a mid-size box truck.

💡 Pro tip:Office Partition. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tradesperson workshop & equipment storage
Everyday tradesperson workshop & equipment storage
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tradesperson workshop & equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtradesperson workshop & equipment storage + seasonal storage
tradesperson workshop & equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$377/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $377/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage cost?

A 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $18,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $377/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud tradesperson workshop & equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tradesperson workshop & equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $377/month on a 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud — From $16,900
12
22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Hobby Farm Equipment Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers store a compact tractor, a UTV, hay rounds, and a feed-mixing station inside a 22×50 with 10-foot legs. Sliding barn doors on the 22-foot gable open wide enough for a tractor with a front-loader bucket.

You're viewing:Hobby Farm Equipment Barn·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×48
smaller
$16,250
22×50
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-HOBBY-FARM-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. Hobby farmers store a compact tractor, a UTV, hay rounds, and a feed-mixing station inside a 22×50 with 10-foot legs.

1 drive-in baysIMPLEMENT + ATTACHMENT ROWSWorkbench + parts wall22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof. Sliding barn doors on the 22-foot gable open wide enough for a tractor with a front-loader bucket raised, and a lean-to off the 50-foot wall gives covered access to the paddock.

💡 Pro tip:Sliding Barn Doors. Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Farm Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby farm equipment barn
Everyday hobby farm equipment barn
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby farm equipment barn + seasonal storage
hobby farm equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Farm Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Farm Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn cost?

A 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud — From $16,900
12
22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Hobby Farm Equipment Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby farmers store a compact tractor, a UTV, hay rounds, and a feed-mixing station inside a 22×50 with 10-foot legs. Sliding barn doors on the 22-foot gable open wide enough for a tractor with a front-loader bucket.

You're viewing:Hobby Farm Equipment Barn·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×48
smaller
$16,250
22×50
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-HOBBY-FARM-EQUIPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your equipment-barn layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. 12-ft doors clear a cab tractor with ROPS up. Hobby farmers store a compact tractor, a UTV, hay rounds, and a feed-mixing station inside a 22×50 with 10-foot legs.

1 drive-in baysIMPLEMENT + ATTACHMENT ROWSWorkbench + parts wall22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · equipment-barn layout

1 drive-in bays · Implement + attachment rows · Workbench + parts wall

1 drive-in bays at the front, implement + attachment rows in the middle, workbench + parts wall at the rear. Capacity: 1 machines under roof. Sliding barn doors on the 22-foot gable open wide enough for a tractor with a front-loader bucket raised, and a lean-to off the 50-foot wall gives covered access to the paddock.

💡 Pro tip:Sliding Barn Doors. Size affords: drive-through bay, welding corner, bulk-fluid rack.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Farm Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby farm equipment barn
Everyday hobby farm equipment barn
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby farm equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby farm equipment barn + seasonal storage
hobby farm equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Farm Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Farm Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn cost?

A 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby farm equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×50 hobby farm equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Farm Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay | Steel and Stud — From $18,100
12
22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,650$18,100SAVE $2,550
or $377/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small business owners turn the 22×50 into a customer-facing service bay for tire shops, oil-change garages, or detail studios. Storefront windows on the 22-foot gable, a 22×50 roll-up for vehicle access, and a walk-in.

You're viewing:Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,100$20,650Save $2,550
or as low as $377/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$18,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-SMALL-COMMERCIALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your one-bay auto shop.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. 12-ft ceiling gives full lift travel. Small business owners turn the 22×50 into a customer-facing service bay for tire shops, oil-change garages, or detail studios.

Lift bayBench + tool wallPARTS SHELVING22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · one-bay auto shop

Lift bay · Bench + tool wall · Parts shelving

Lift bay at the front, bench + tool wall in the middle, parts shelving at the rear. Capacity: 1 two-post lift + bench work. Storefront windows on the 22-foot gable, a 22×50 roll-up for vehicle access, and a walk-in customer door keep the layout commercial-grade.

💡 Pro tip:Storefront Windows. Size affords: two-post lift, compressor closet, waste-oil caddy.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday small commercial storefront or service bay
Everyday small commercial storefront or service bay
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small commercial storefront or service bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall commercial storefront or service bay + seasonal storage
small commercial storefront or service bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$377/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $377/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay cost?

A 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay from Steel and Stud starts at $18,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $377/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud small commercial storefront or service bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small commercial storefront or service bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $377/month on a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$18,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay | Steel and Stud — From $18,100
12
22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,650$18,100SAVE $2,550
or $377/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Small business owners turn the 22×50 into a customer-facing service bay for tire shops, oil-change garages, or detail studios. Storefront windows on the 22-foot gable, a 22×50 roll-up for vehicle access, and a walk-in.

You're viewing:Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,100$20,650Save $2,550
or as low as $377/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$18,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-SMALL-COMMERCIALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your one-bay auto shop.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. 12-ft ceiling gives full lift travel. Small business owners turn the 22×50 into a customer-facing service bay for tire shops, oil-change garages, or detail studios.

Lift bayBench + tool wallPARTS SHELVING22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · one-bay auto shop

Lift bay · Bench + tool wall · Parts shelving

Lift bay at the front, bench + tool wall in the middle, parts shelving at the rear. Capacity: 1 two-post lift + bench work. Storefront windows on the 22-foot gable, a 22×50 roll-up for vehicle access, and a walk-in customer door keep the layout commercial-grade.

💡 Pro tip:Storefront Windows. Size affords: two-post lift, compressor closet, waste-oil caddy.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday small commercial storefront or service bay
Everyday small commercial storefront or service bay
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small commercial storefront or service bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall commercial storefront or service bay + seasonal storage
small commercial storefront or service bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$377/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $377/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay cost?

A 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay from Steel and Stud starts at $18,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $377/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud small commercial storefront or service bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small commercial storefront or service bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $377/month on a 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Home Workshop & Hobby Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Woodworkers and gearheads spec a 22×50 with insulation, a single 22×50 roll-up, and 50 feet of clear sidewall for a CNC table, dust collection, lumber rack, and a project car lift. Plenty of space for a half-bath.

You're viewing:Home Workshop & Hobby Garage·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Mezzanine Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-HOME-WORKSHOP-HOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Woodworkers and gearheads spec a 22×50 with insulation, a single 22×50 roll-up, and 50 feet of clear sidewall for a CNC table, dust collection, lumber rack, and a project car lift.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Plenty of space for a half-bath partition near the front and a mezzanine loft over the workbench end for finished-goods storage.

💡 Pro tip:Mezzanine Ready. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Workshop & Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Workshop & Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday home workshop & hobby garage
Everyday home workshop & hobby garage
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home workshop & hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome workshop & hobby garage + seasonal storage
home workshop & hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Workshop & Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Workshop & Hobby Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Workshop & Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage cost?

A 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home workshop & hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home workshop & hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage typically adds $8,800–$13,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Workshop & Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Home Workshop & Hobby Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Woodworkers and gearheads spec a 22×50 with insulation, a single 22×50 roll-up, and 50 feet of clear sidewall for a CNC table, dust collection, lumber rack, and a project car lift. Plenty of space for a half-bath.

You're viewing:Home Workshop & Hobby Garage·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Mezzanine Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-HOME-WORKSHOP-HOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Woodworkers and gearheads spec a 22×50 with insulation, a single 22×50 roll-up, and 50 feet of clear sidewall for a CNC table, dust collection, lumber rack, and a project car lift.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. Plenty of space for a half-bath partition near the front and a mezzanine loft over the workbench end for finished-goods storage.

💡 Pro tip:Mezzanine Ready. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Workshop & Hobby Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Workshop & Hobby Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday home workshop & hobby garage
Everyday home workshop & hobby garage
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home workshop & hobby garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome workshop & hobby garage + seasonal storage
home workshop & hobby garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Workshop & Hobby Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Workshop & Hobby Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Workshop & Hobby Garage also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage cost?

A 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home workshop & hobby garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home workshop & hobby garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×50 home workshop & hobby garage typically adds $8,800–$13,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Workshop & Hobby Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Lake-house owners with a 28-foot pontoon or a wakeboard tower boat need 12-foot legs minimum and 50 feet of depth to clear the trailer tongue. The 22×50 fits the rig with room for a side-by-side, jet skis on a stack.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Hurricane Rated
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-BOAT-TRAILER-INDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. Lake-house owners with a 28-foot pontoon or a wakeboard tower boat need 12-foot legs minimum and 50 feet of depth to clear the trailer tongue.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 40ft + a second toy. The 22×50 fits the rig with room for a side-by-side, jet skis on a stack rack, and life-jacket lockers.

💡 Pro tip:Hurricane Rated. Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer indoor storage
Everyday boat & trailer indoor storage
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer indoor storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer indoor storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer indoor storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage cost?

A 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer indoor storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer indoor storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & trailer indoor storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Lake-house owners with a 28-foot pontoon or a wakeboard tower boat need 12-foot legs minimum and 50 feet of depth to clear the trailer tongue. The 22×50 fits the rig with room for a side-by-side, jet skis on a stack.

You're viewing:Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Hurricane Rated
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 10x10 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-BOAT-TRAILER-INDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your boat-storage layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. 12-ft doors take a pontoon on bunks. Lake-house owners with a 28-foot pontoon or a wakeboard tower boat need 12-foot legs minimum and 50 feet of depth to clear the trailer tongue.

Boat + trailer baySecond toy / daily driverRinse + gear zone22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · boat-storage layout

Boat + trailer bay · Second toy / daily driver · Rinse + gear zone

Boat + trailer bay at the front, second toy / daily driver in the middle, rinse + gear zone at the rear. Capacity: 1 boat to 40ft + a second toy. The 22×50 fits the rig with room for a side-by-side, jet skis on a stack rack, and life-jacket lockers.

💡 Pro tip:Hurricane Rated. Size affords: rinse-down bay, overhead rod racks, winch point.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday boat & trailer indoor storage
Everyday boat & trailer indoor storage
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a boat & trailer indoor storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWboat & trailer indoor storage + seasonal storage
boat & trailer indoor storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage cost?

A 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud boat & trailer indoor storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud boat & trailer indoor storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a boat & trailer indoor storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room | Steel and Stud — From $16,900
12
22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby horse owners partition the 22×50 into two 22×50 stalls on one end, a 22×50 tack and feed room in the middle, and a covered grooming bay at the back. Sliding barn doors on the 22-foot gable open to a paddock.

You're viewing:Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Interior Partitions
  • Galvalume Roof
  • Sliding Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-HORSE-BARN-TWO-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Hobby horse owners partition the 22×50 into two 22×50 stalls on one end, a 22×50 tack and feed room in the middle, and a covered grooming bay at the back.

3 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

3 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

3 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 3 horses + tack + feed. Sliding barn doors on the 22-foot gable open to a paddock.

💡 Pro tip:Galvalume Roof. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn with two stalls and tack room
Everyday horse barn with two stalls and tack room
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn with two stalls and tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn with two stalls and tack room + seasonal storage
horse barn with two stalls and tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room cost?

A 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse barn with two stalls and tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn with two stalls and tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room | Steel and Stud — From $16,900
12
22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hobby horse owners partition the 22×50 into two 22×50 stalls on one end, a 22×50 tack and feed room in the middle, and a covered grooming bay at the back. Sliding barn doors on the 22-foot gable open to a paddock.

You're viewing:Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Interior Partitions
  • Galvalume Roof
  • Sliding Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-HORSE-BARN-TWO-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your shedrow horse barn.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Center-aisle layout with cross-ties. Hobby horse owners partition the 22×50 into two 22×50 stalls on one end, a 22×50 tack and feed room in the middle, and a covered grooming bay at the back.

3 stalls10-FT CENTER AISLETack + Feed room22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · shedrow horse barn

3 stalls · 10-ft center aisle · Tack + Feed room

3 stalls at the front, 10-ft center aisle in the middle, tack + feed room at the rear. Capacity: 3 horses + tack + feed. Sliding barn doors on the 22-foot gable open to a paddock.

💡 Pro tip:Galvalume Roof. Size affords: dutch doors per stall, wash bay rough-in, fly system.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday horse barn with two stalls and tack room
Everyday horse barn with two stalls and tack room
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a horse barn with two stalls and tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhorse barn with two stalls and tack room + seasonal storage
horse barn with two stalls and tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room cost?

A 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud horse barn with two stalls and tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud horse barn with two stalls and tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $18,500
12
22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,100$18,500SAVE $2,600
or $385/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Welding or Fabrication Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Mobile welders graduating to a fixed shop pick the 22×50 for its 22-foot clear span, which fits a welding table, a 22×50 plasma table, and a steel-rack wall along the 50-foot sidewall. Spec the 12-gauge frame, vented.

You're viewing:Welding or Fabrication Shop·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,500$21,100Save $2,600
or as low as $385/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×48
smaller
$17,850
22×50
this size
$18,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Gable Vents
  • 26 GA Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-WELDING-FABRICATBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Mobile welders graduating to a fixed shop pick the 22×50 for its 22-foot clear span, which fits a welding table, a 22×50 plasma table, and a steel-rack wall along the 50-foot sidewall.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Spec the 12-gauge frame, vented gable ends, and an insulated walk-in door for year-round use.

💡 Pro tip:Gable Vents. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Welding or Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Welding or Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Welding or Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday welding or fabrication shop
Everyday welding or fabrication shop
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a welding or fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwelding or fabrication shop + seasonal storage
welding or fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$385/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 welding or fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $385/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Welding or Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Welding or Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Welding or Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Welding or Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop cost?

A 22×50 welding or fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $18,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $385/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 welding or fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud welding or fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud welding or fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $385/month on a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 welding or fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 welding or fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×50 welding or fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 22×50 welding or fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Welding or Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$18,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud — From $18,500
12
22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,100$18,500SAVE $2,600
or $385/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Welding or Fabrication Shop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Mobile welders graduating to a fixed shop pick the 22×50 for its 22-foot clear span, which fits a welding table, a 22×50 plasma table, and a steel-rack wall along the 50-foot sidewall. Spec the 12-gauge frame, vented.

You're viewing:Welding or Fabrication Shop·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,500$21,100Save $2,600
or as low as $385/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×48
smaller
$17,850
22×50
this size
$18,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Gable Vents
  • 26 GA Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-WELDING-FABRICATBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. Mobile welders graduating to a fixed shop pick the 22×50 for its 22-foot clear span, which fits a welding table, a 22×50 plasma table, and a steel-rack wall along the 50-foot sidewall.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. Spec the 12-gauge frame, vented gable ends, and an insulated walk-in door for year-round use.

💡 Pro tip:Gable Vents. Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Welding or Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Welding or Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Welding or Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday welding or fabrication shop
Everyday welding or fabrication shop
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a welding or fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwelding or fabrication shop + seasonal storage
welding or fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$385/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 welding or fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $385/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Welding or Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Welding or Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Welding or Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Welding or Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏡 22×50

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Welding or Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop cost?

A 22×50 welding or fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $18,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $385/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 welding or fabrication shop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud welding or fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud welding or fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $385/month on a 22×50 welding or fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 22×50 welding or fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 welding or fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 22×50 welding or fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 22×50 welding or fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Welding or Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop), built for daily backyard use.

Rural property owners building a starter barndominium use the 22×50 as the shell: a 22×50 living section with insulation and framed openings for windows, and a 22×50 shop section with a 22×50 roll-up. Add R-19 batt.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your compact barndo shell.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Residential insulation package on the shell. Rural property owners building a starter barndominium use the 22×50 as the shell: a 22×50 living section with insulation and framed openings for windows, and a 22×50 shop section with a 22×50 roll-up.

Living + kitchenBEDROOM + BATHUtility / mech corner22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · compact barndo shell

Living + kitchen · Bedroom + bath · Utility / mech corner

Living + kitchen at the front, bedroom + bath in the middle, utility / mech corner at the rear. Capacity: 1-bed living shell. Add R-19 batt insulation, a vapor barrier, and pre-framed openings for HVAC and plumbing.

💡 Pro tip:Pre-Framed Openings. Size affords: 9-ft ceilings, covered entry.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop).

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell (half living, half shop)
Everyday barndominium shell (half living, half shop)
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell (half living, half shop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell (half living, half shop) + seasonal storage
barndominium shell (half living, half shop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) cost?

A 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell (half living, half shop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop)?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell (half living, half shop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop).

What warranty comes with the 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) typically adds $8,800–$13,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
22x50 metal building: standard configuration angle, 1,100 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

22′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 22×50 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) | Steel and Stud — From $16,250
12
22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings22×50Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop), built for daily backyard use.

Rural property owners building a starter barndominium use the 22×50 as the shell: a 22×50 living section with insulation and framed openings for windows, and a 22×50 shop section with a 22×50 roll-up. Add R-19 batt.

You're viewing:Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)·Size22×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 22×50
22×50
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-22X50-BARNDOMINIUM-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your compact barndo shell.

22 feet wide × 50 feet long. Residential insulation package on the shell. Rural property owners building a starter barndominium use the 22×50 as the shell: a 22×50 living section with insulation and framed openings for windows, and a 22×50 shop section with a 22×50 roll-up.

Living + kitchenBEDROOM + BATHUtility / mech corner22′ × 50′ · 1,100 sq ft · compact barndo shell

Living + kitchen · Bedroom + bath · Utility / mech corner

Living + kitchen at the front, bedroom + bath in the middle, utility / mech corner at the rear. Capacity: 1-bed living shell. Add R-19 batt insulation, a vapor barrier, and pre-framed openings for HVAC and plumbing.

💡 Pro tip:Pre-Framed Openings. Size affords: 9-ft ceilings, covered entry.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop).

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 22×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) spec sheet.

Width22'
Length50' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop).

DAILY USEEveryday barndominium shell (half living, half shop)
Everyday barndominium shell (half living, half shop)
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a barndominium shell (half living, half shop).
STORAGE OVERFLOWbarndominium shell (half living, half shop) + seasonal storage
barndominium shell (half living, half shop) + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) — what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 22×50?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 22′ × 50′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 22×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 22×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 22×50 Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop)

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
23×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) also viewed:

🏡 22×50

Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay

22×50 two-car detached garage with workshop bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Two-Car Detached Garage with Workshop Bay →
🎯 22×50

RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes

22×50 rv garage for class a motorhomes configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Garage for Class A Motorhomes →
🏢 22×50

Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage

22×50 tradesperson workshop & equipment storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Tradesperson Workshop & Equipment Storage →
🌾 22×50

Hobby Farm Equipment Barn

22×50 hobby farm equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hobby Farm Equipment Barn →
🏢 22×50

Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay

22×50 small commercial storefront or service bay configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Small Commercial Storefront or Service Bay →
🏡 22×50

Home Workshop & Hobby Garage

22×50 home workshop & hobby garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Workshop & Hobby Garage →
🎯 22×50

Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage

22×50 boat & trailer indoor storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Indoor Storage →
🌾 22×50

Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room

22×50 horse barn with two stalls and tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn with Two Stalls and Tack Room →
🏭 22×50

Welding or Fabrication Shop

22×50 welding or fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Welding or Fabrication Shop →
🏢 22×50

Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse

22×50 self-storage or mini-warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage or Mini-Warehouse →
🎯 22×50

Detached She Shed or Man Cave

22×50 detached she shed or man cave configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached She Shed or Man Cave →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) questions, answered.

How much does a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) cost?

A 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud barndominium shell (half living, half shop) ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop)?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud barndominium shell (half living, half shop) different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop).

What warranty comes with the 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop)?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 22×50 barndominium shell (half living, half shop) typically adds $8,800–$13,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Barndominium Shell (Half Living, Half Shop) quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Not Sure Which Size? Build Your Carport in 3D and See Your Price Instantly

Flexible Payment Options

3 Ways to Pay - Pick What Works

No need to pay full price today. Choose from standard deposit, easy monthly financing, or rent-to-own with zero credit check. Every option includes free delivery & professional installation.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Carport Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

4-8 Weeks Current Lead Time — 127 Carports Ordered This Month Alone

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Carport

A prefabricated steel carport is the most cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, boats and equipment. Here is why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel carport order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees. Just confirm your site is level and we handle the rest.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. 14-gauge frames include a full workmanship warranty. Steel structures genuinely last decades.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work directly with multiple manufacturers, cutting out distributor markups. In most cases our prices beat the manufacturer's own direct pricing. 40-60% less than comparable wood or concrete construction.

🌞

12 Color Options Included

Choose from 12 standard powder-coat colors at no additional cost. Galvanized and primer finishes also available. Your color choice will not affect your price or lead time.

Engineered for Your Climate

All structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 12-gauge certified frames are available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

🔭

Multiple Manufacturers, One Source

We partner with multiple vetted manufacturers nationwide so you always get the closest installer, the fastest lead time, and competitive pricing for your specific location and climate zone.

Choose the Right Roof

Regular vs A-Frame vs Vertical Roof Carport

Selecting the right roof style affects weather performance, aesthetics, price and longevity. Here is how each option compares across key factors.

Regular / Horizontal

Most affordable, simple design

Lowest starting price
Fastest lead time
Moderate rain and snow shedding
Horizontal roof panels
Not ideal for heavy snow areas
Best for mild climates

Vertical Roof

Best performance, highest durability

Superior snow and rain shedding
Panels run vertically top-to-bottom
No standing water or debris ponding
Ideal for heavy snow regions
Price premium (+15%)
Recommended for all climates
Verified Reviews

What Carport Owners Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their metal carport.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I ordered two carports for the Healthy Schools Healthy Communities grant in Cabool, MO. Bill went above and beyond — thorough on every detail, called me right back, walked me through the whole order. He even followed up on instructions for the slab pour."

HS
Grant Coordinator
Cabool, MO
Metal Carports
Common Questions

Metal Carport FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Although this can be done with one person, we recommend having at least two people on hand to ensure safety. You can enlist the help of as many people as you like. All tubular steel orders from Steel and Stud include professional installation by a certified crew, so you do not need to self-install unless you specifically choose a DIY kit.

Carports and More Inc. has manufacturers that install in 48 contiguous states. Parts of some states are not covered by the manufacturer used for online pricing. If an order is placed and your location is not in a covered area, we will call you with the correct pricing for your area before proceeding.

Absolutely. You can install the building yourself. In most states, there is a 5% discount for self-installed buildings. The materials can be delivered to your location or picked up at the nearest factory. Contact us for current availability and self-install options in your state.

Manufacturers aim to install units within a 4-week period from the time an approved order is received. In some cases it is done sooner; however, it can take longer depending on the time of year, your location, and seasonal demand. Areas with extreme winter weather may close temporarily. Buildings over 24 feet wide require special construction and can take longer to manufacture.

Most standard carport units are constructed in just a few hours. It may take up to two days depending on the size and complexity of the building. Large triple-wide or commercial-span carports may require a second day for proper installation and inspection.

The key to a successful installation is a flat, level surface. Site preparation and building permits are the responsibility of the customer. You have approximately 2 to 3 inches of adjustment available during installation to account for minor grade differences. If your lot is significantly out of level, materials to level the site must be on hand when the crew arrives.

Re-bar and pin anchors (1/2-inch diameter, 36-inch long) are included for ground and asphalt installations. Concrete anchor bolts are used on concrete slabs at no extra charge. Mobile home auger anchors are available for ground installation at an additional cost. In several states, units enclosed on three sides require a minimum of four mobile home augers for ground installations.

Yes. You have 12 standard colors to choose from at no additional charge. Color selection does not affect your price. Galvanized and primer finishes are also available. Your color selection is made at the time of order and cannot be changed after fabrication begins.

Permit requirements vary by city, county and state. You should contact your local building department before ordering. All permit requirements such as set-backs must be resolved before ordering because once engineering plans are sent, your deposit becomes non-refundable. Generic engineered plans are available in most states. States requiring building-specific plans and calculations include CO, ID, MT, ND, NE, NJ, OR, SD, UT, WA and WY. Contact us if you have questions about your area.

The vertical roof allows water, snow and debris to run off quickly without ponding. The vertical panel orientation prevents accumulation and is especially recommended in high snow-load areas. If you are in a state with significant annual snowfall or heavy seasonal rain, the vertical roof upgrade is strongly recommended even though it carries a modest price premium.

Sizes are shown as width x length x leg height. Width is measured from outside to outside of each base rail. Length is measured by the roof metal, which includes a 6-inch overhang on each end, so the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length. Height is measured by the actual leg on the outer wall. Standard-style roof units will be 1 foot taller at the sidewall than the selected leg height.

The frames are available in either 14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel tubing. The roof, side and end panels are 29-gauge steel with a painted finish. Galvanized frames provide corrosion resistance. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick; 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick. Lower gauge equals thicker, stronger steel.

14-gauge frame units carry a 30-day workmanship warranty. 12-gauge frames include both the 30-day workmanship warranty and a 20-year limited rust-through warranty on the framing, assuming normal user care and maintenance. Warranty coverage begins on the date of installation.

Yes; however, your deposit may not be fully refundable. You have 3 days from the date of order confirmation to cancel and receive a full refund. Cancellations must be in writing. After 3 days, deposits may be applied as credit toward any future purchase within 3 years. Deposits on custom-size units are non-refundable. Installation timing delays alone are not a valid reason for cancellation.

No. In most cases our prices are the same as or lower than ordering direct from the manufacturer. We work with multiple manufacturers and can often source your structure from the most competitive option for your location, size and timing, something a single manufacturer cannot do for you.

Yes. Extensions, lean-tos, sidewalls and doors can be added after installation, though there may be an additional service charge. If you plan to eventually enclose a carport with walk-in or roll-up doors, your original leg height must be 6 feet or taller to allow for standard door frames.

Slab requirements vary by manufacturer. Please contact us before pouring your concrete slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement for your specific carport model. Pouring the wrong size slab can delay installation.

12-foot legs are standard and available on all units. Longer legs may be available for special applications such as RV clearance or commercial-height requirements. Contact us if you need legs taller than 12 feet and we will confirm availability for your chosen structure type.

The balance due is paid directly to the manufacturer after your carport is fully installed and you are satisfied. The manufacturer accepts cash, check and credit card. They will confirm accepted payment methods when they contact you to schedule installation. PayPal is not accepted directly by the manufacturer but can be arranged through Steel and Stud with applicable processing fees. If you prefer not to pay the full balance at once, ask about our monthly financing or rent-to-own (RTO) options — both are available and let you own your carport with as little as the first month's payment down.

Yes — Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment — pay a deposit now, balance after install, zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing — competitive rates from $89/mo over 12–72 months with a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) — as low as $49/mo with no credit check required, first month's payment as the only down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. RTO is available on most residential carport sizes. View all financing options →

Gauge refers to the thickness of the steel tubing: lower gauge means thicker steel. 12-gauge is 2.5mm thick and is the stronger, more durable option backed by a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge is 1.9mm thick, lighter and more affordable, carrying a 30-day workmanship warranty. For heavy snow loads, high winds or long-term investment, 12-gauge is always recommended.

Standard single-car carports (12x21, 15x21) start at $1,195 with free delivery and installation on tubular steel orders. Two-car carports (18x21, 20x21) range from $1,595 to $2,595 depending on roof style and gauge. Triple-wide carports (24x29 and larger) start around $3,895. Large commercial spans (20x38+, 24x45+) start at $5,195 and up. Contact us for a precise quote including your location, size and options.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Carport Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Carport Sizes and Dimensions Guide

Metal carport dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Width runs from 10 feet to 40 feet for standard tubular steel units. Length is effectively unlimited in increments. Leg height starts at 6 feet for standard single-car carports and goes up to 12 feet as a standard option, with taller legs available on request.

Single-car carports (12 to 15 feet wide, 21 feet long) are the most affordable option starting at $1,195. Two-car carports (18 to 22 feet wide) are the most popular category, covering two standard vehicles with room to open doors. Triple-wide carports (24+ feet wide) accommodate three vehicles, trucks, boats or large equipment.

When planning your site, remember that the base rail is 1 foot shorter than the roof length due to 6-inch overhangs on each end. If you need exactly 40 feet of enclosed coverage, order a 41-foot length carport. Contact our team to confirm the right dimensions before ordering.

How Much Does a Metal Carport Cost in 2026?

Metal carport prices in 2026 range from $1,195 for a basic 12x21 single-car carport up to $9,000 or more for a large 30x50 commercial-span structure. All tubular steel carport prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider carports cost more per linear foot), Length (additional bays add proportional cost), Leg Height (taller legs cost more), Roof Style (vertical adds ~15% over regular), and Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds ~12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty).

DIY carport kits cost less because installation labor is excluded, but most property owners find the free professional installation included in tubular steel orders to be a significant value. A crew that installs 50 carports per week consistently outperforms a first-time DIY attempt.

Metal Carport Installation: What to Expect

After your order is confirmed and your deposit placed, the manufacturer assigns an installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days of ordering to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level surface (within 2-3 inches), clear access for a delivery truck, and any permit posted or available. Concrete pads are preferred but not required for ground or gravel installations. The installation crew typically completes a standard single or two-car carport in 3 to 6 hours. Larger triple-wide or tall-clearance units may require a full day.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your carport is installed and you are satisfied with the result. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Looking for something larger or more enclosed? Explore our full range: enclosed steel garages from $3,195, metal barns for agricultural use, tall clearance RV and boat covers, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and all commercial steel building types. Every product category includes the same factory-direct pricing and professional service.

Ready to Protect Your Vehicles with a Steel Carport?

Join 15,000+ property owners who chose Steel and Stud. Factory-direct pricing with free delivery and installation on all tubular steel orders.

View Cart